Tektronix 519 Service and user manual

INSTRUCTION

MANUAL

Before operating this instrument,

plastic

shipping clamps

the of the amplifier chassis. These clamps should be

saved

and

the

shock mount.

as

the nut.

reinstalled

is

to

be

on

the instrument

Is Inserted next to the chassis to prevent

to

The clamp should mount

be

sure to remove

from

the shock mounts

as

shown in the sketch if

shipped. Be sure the tongue

the

same

damage

side of the shock

TYPE

OSCILLOSCOPE

IMPORTANT

Tektronix,

S.W. Millikan

070-243

Inc

.

Way • P.

0.

Box

500

e

Beaverton, Orego

n

97005

e

Phone

644-0161

e

Cobles:

Tektronix

Type

519

WARRANTY

All

Tektronix instruments

against defective materials

ship for one year. Tektronix

manufactured in our own

ranted

for

the

life of

Any

questions

ranty mentioned

with

your

Tektronix Field Engineer.

Tektronix repair

service

is

geared

fore all

requests for repairs

ment

parts

tronix

area

fastest possible service. Please include the

instrument requests

ileges

Beaverton, Oregon. States tents of this pub

duced

the

should

field

Office

. This

procedure

Type

for ports or service.

Specifications

reserved.

Copyright

©

of

America.

in any form without perm ission of

copyright

o

~

a,.

and

transformers.

plant,

the

instrument.

with

respect

above

should

and

replacement-part

directly to

the

and

be

directed

or

Representative in your

will

assure

and

Serial number with

and

price

change

1961

b'y

Tektronix,

Printed in

All

rights

reservid. Con-

li

cation may not

ne

r.

warranted

workman·

ore

to

the

be

taken up

field,

there-

replace-

to

the

you

th! United

i)e

repro-

war-

war

Tek-

the

all

priv-

Inc

-

.,

CONTENTS

Section

®!

Characteristics

Operating Information

Applications

4

Circuit Description

5

Maintenance

6

Calibration

Procedure

Type

519

@

SECTION

1

General Information

The

Tektronix Type 519 Oscilloscope laboratory instrument designed expressly and measurement of high-frequency phenomena. Fast linear sweeps, high triggering sensitivity, wide-bond trigger system, and bandwidth well beyond 1000 megacycles permit accurate repetitive and single-shot displays to be observed photographed nal delay line permits display of the leading

the oscilloscope. Sweep delay control through 35 nanoseconds permits viewing signals before signal event.

The erators. erator waveforms which can oscilloscope itself, or form

generators meet most requirements to complete a test

setup.

CRT

accelerating potential, excellent

from

fractional-nanosecond signals.

in

the vertical channel of the instrument

Type 519 incorporates two internal waveform gen-

An

adjustable repetition-rote fast-rise pulse gen-

and

a fast-rise calibration-step generator supply

be

used

to

drive external devices. These wove-

VERTICAL-DEFLECTION

is

o wide-bond

for

the observation

edge

of the signal triggering

and

after the main

to

check the calibration of the

SYSTEM

ve

rtical

and

An

inter-

Vertical Deflection Factor

With Type

T519P-A

CRT,

less

than

10

CRT

deflection foetor indicated on

instrument.

volts per em. Exact

CRT

face

mask

of each

Passband

With Type

T519P-A

CRT,

3-db down.

de to 1000 megacycles

minimum

Risetime

With Type T

519P-A

CRT,

less

than 0.35 nanosecond*

Input Impedance

125

ohms.

nonosecond=lO-~

* 1

seconds.

Maximum Allowable Input Power to Vertical Channel

1.8 watts, corresponding

to ±IS

volts

de

or

Maximum Allowable Peak Signal Amplitude

±

100

volts. Repeated pulses of higher voltage may dam-

age

the 125-ohm signal termination resistor.

Internal Signal Delay

Approximately

45

nanoseconds, fixed.

Voltage Standing

Nominally

1.25:1

Wave

to 1000 me.

Ratio

TRIGGER

Triggering Signal

Internal erator, internal external

External Triggering Signal Requirements

Pulse

amplitude:

or longer. Maximum permissible external triggering signal:

10

volts peak, higher with external attenuators. Repeti-

± tion rote: to 1000

at

Internal Triggering Signal Requirements

Pulse

amplitude: sufficient signal width deflection ation: 1 nanosecond or longer. Repetition rote: to 1000

Countdown

A sweep frequencies below the maxi gering circuits countdown for trigger signal frequencies

Sources

from

± applied signals, internal

from

the Calibration-Step Generator,

from

± trigger inputs.

20

millivolts. Duration: 1 nanosecond

me.

on

the screen (approximately

is

obtained for each trigger signal

mum

to

produce a 2 trace-

sweep repetition rote.

rms.

from

at

the

Rote

200

mvj.

me.

trigger signal

Gen-

Dur-

Trig-

1-1

and

Choructerittic..-Type

higher than the tr

igger requirements: 1 external t rigger cal

in

put.

Pulse

Amplitude

Single control ad quency

sync.

519

maximum

sweep repetition rote . Sine-wave

me

to 1000

inpu

t, or

or

justs pulse triggering l

An

additional control provides vernier

me,

200

mv

peak-to-peak signal to verti-

Sync

20

mv

peak-to-peak

evel

or high-fre-

sync.

Delay

Sweep-start delay aver a range of 35 nanoseconds. Permits

waveform to be positioned horizontall y within t

sweep, to displa y a selected time interval.

TIME

BASE

Sweep Rates

N

ine

Range

s:

2,

5,

10,

20,

50,

100

, 200,

500,

and

1000

seconds per centimeter.

nano-

Accuracy

Typically within 2% of indic the 2-nanosecond range, which cati

ons

apply to the entire sweep except

seconds

or 2 mm

ated rote on

oil

ranges except

is

within 3%. These specifi-

for

the

first

(whi

chever

is

larger}.

2 nano-

Single Sweeps

Normal or single sweeps selected by front-panel

+Trigge

r Output

Greater than 1

-vo

lt

pulse

into

50

ohms upon triggering.

Delayed +

Greater than 1-volt gate into with of the sweep-delay control.

Gate

50

RATE

GENERATOR

ohms during sweep; deloyed

respect to + Trigger Output depending on the setting

switch

.

Risetime

L

ess

than 0.8 nanosecond [0.5 nanosecond typical).

Pulse

Repetition Rate

3 cps to

30 kc, contin

uousl

y variable.

1-2

Pulse

Duration

10

nanoseconds + or -20%

at the 50% amplitude points.

Output Impedance

SO

ohms.

Amplitude

Approximatel

y+

15

volts.

he

CALIBRATION-STEP

GENERATOR

Risetime

Approximately 0

.1

nanosecond.

Repetition Rate

Ad

justable f

rom

400 to

850 normally operoted neor reed-switch resonant frequency approximately

750

step waveforms per second;

steps per second.

Output Impedance

125

ohms.

Amplitude

Into 125oh

ms,

0 to

10

volts.

Into

50

125

ohms through T50/

ohms.

adapter, 0 to I volt . Voltages applied to both impedances ore continuo

usly var

ages up to

iable and calibrated. Uncalibrated

50

volts into

Polarity

The

ouput polari

ty

can be selected by a front-panel switch.

CATHODE

RAY

TUBE

Type

T5

19P-A

Phosphors

Type Pll phosphor standord (reco mmended

photogra phic recording phors a

vail

Usable Viewing

T

wo

centimeters vertical,

at

able only on special request.

fastest sweep rate) . Other phos-

Area

six

centimeters horizontal.

for

at

T125 volt-

single-shot

Accelerating

24k.v.

Voltage

Spot Diameter

0.004 inch (

app

roximately

0.1

mm)

at

normal intensity .

Deflection

Ele

ctrostatic. Vertical deflection system tributed-constant delay line. Conventional horizontal deflection plates.

is 125-ohm dis-

Charact

eri

stics-Type

Power Requirements

105

to 125 or

210

to 250 volts,

50

mately 650

watts.

to 60 cycles, approxi-

ACCESSORIES

Information on accessories for use with this instrument included

at

the rear of the mechanical parts

list.

519

is

CONSTRUCTION

AND

POWER

REQUIREMENTS

Construction

Single-unit construction with light-weight aluminum-alloy ch

assis

and

bottom panels

four-piece vinyl-fi

nish

are

separately removable.

cabinet. Side panels, top

Ventilation

Filtered forced a ir with protective thermo) cutout insures safe operating temperatures.

Dimensions

Approximately

@

22

'/~

"

high,

14J//' wide,

and

25'//'

long.

1-3

Operating

Information--Type

519

TYPE

519

OSCILLOSCOPE

:.

~.::.-:::.:-::-:_;-::-:.

.,_

...

__

.....

-

._

2-0

fig. 2-1 .

Type 519

Ol cillon op• front pon•

l.

Introdu

ct

io

n

The Type 519 instrument designed for observing, measuring, graphically recording phenomena microsecond} domain. However, before the instrument con be used derstanding of the Instruction Manual this understanding. Much of the familiarity with the controls will description panel

FOCUS

INTENSITY ASTIGMATISM

SCALE

Groticule A knurled Control

NANOSEC DELAY

NORMAL-SINGLE Selects SWEEP

CYCLES/SEC

Oscilloscope

successfully,

it

is

important for you to have on

of

the operation of

is

come only with actual use

of

each

markings

FUNCTION

intended to help you acquire

of the front-pone! controls

ore

shown

in

Fig.

OF

CR

Used

in

conjuction with the

contralto

focus the Adjusts the brightness of the trace. Used

in

conjunction with the trol to obtain a round focused trace.

ILLUM.

Adjusts the brightness markings.

knob

of

the groticule permits graticule to be

moved down out

TIME

/C

M Selects

BASE

the desired time

Determines the

sweep with respect to the trigger signal

input.

either normal

operation.

RAT

E

GENERATOR

Used

in

conjunction with the

control to set the Rote put frequency.

is

o high

speed

in

the nanosecond

each

control.

of

the instrument. A brief

follows. Front-

2-1.

CONTROLS

T

ASTIGMATISM

oscilloscope

spot

and

of

the groticule

located below the center

of

the viewing

base

.

delay

of the start of the

or

single-sweep

Generator

laboratory

and

photo-

Th

is section

trace.

FOCUS con-

a sharply

area.

MULTIPLIER

(milli-

out-

un-

SECTION

OPERATING

INFORMATION

MULTIPLIER

RANGE

VARIABLE

VOLTS

REED

DRIVE

FREQUENCY

PULSE

TUDE

VERNIER

FUNCT

GAIN*

TRIGGER SOURCE

• Also

Multiplier for the Should

be

Generator

CALIBRATION-STEP

Selects full-scale brated

steps, a variable uncalibrated step amplitude, be set to Generator

Permits the on arbitrary desired amplitude 50

volts into a 125-ohm load.

Sets

the output

step waveform

tions of the

SWITCH:

Ad

jus

ts

the reed-switch magnetic

tion for proper

reed operation.

Controls

frequency

netic exc

it

bounce.

TR

AMPLI-

Selects triggering signal amplitude

OR SYNC*

qui red to justs synchronization.

SYNC

Used

in

TUDE

OR

sweep Permits choice of triggered

displays. Selects

triggering signal.

Selects

polarity.

TRIGGER

OPERATION •eclion

.

proper gain

the triggering signal source

see

I

ON*

set to

is

or

STANDBY

is

step

RANGE

ation to help minimize contact

I

GGER

operate

conjunction with

SYNC

CYCLES/SEC

OFF

position when Rote

not being used.

GE

NERATOR

amplitude

a standby condition.

not being used.

of

when

Calibration-Step

waveform to be preset to

up

voltage

of the

in

calibration-

the

TO

V

and

switch.

closures

or

permits single

of

the reed-switch

triggering circuits,

PULSE

control to synchronize the

or

synchronized

or

attenuation for the

of

lront-ponel,

fig.

control.

the

Should

to

l

V posi-

excita-

AMPLI-

about

mag-

or

and

2-1

2

cali-

re-

ad-

Operating

Information-Type 519

POSITIONING

VERTIC

XIS ROTA-

A TIO

HORIZONTAL

DIM

ON

Adjusts the vertical position of the trace.

AL

Aligns the trace parallel to the horizontal groticule lines.

N

Adjusts t

he

POWER

Used

ADJ.

to adjust the brightness of pilot light

after 45-second worm-up period. ACiineswitch.

PRELIMINARY

horizontal position of the trace .

INSTRUCTIONS

Cooling

A blower maintains safe operating temperature Type 519 Oscilloscope circulating

must

ment ventilating holes kept clean to permit adequate air flow.

A ther

mal

inst

rument becomes overheated.

turn to

full

by

it

be placed so that the air intake

drawing air through o filter and

over the components. Therefore, the instru-

are

not

blocked. The air filter

cutout switch disconnects the de power

brightness

The

in

pilot

the event that de power

and

lamp will

If

this

happens, check immediately for proper a irflow into

The

the instrument. and reduces the time the thermal switch remains open. DC power safe value.

blower continues to cool the inte rior

will

be restored w

hen

Power Requirements

The

regulated power supplies

scope

will

operate with line voltages

(1

17

nominal}

or

from

210

to

for

line voltage

factory

panel near the power receptacle. Transformer connections may using the information given

former

connected

23

for

across the moto r lead connections former connections a re changed, the voltage indicated on

in

the

th

e metal tog should

conforms to the new operating voltage.

cabinet

must

Fo

be

applied voltage indicated

if

the

receptacle ot the rear of the instrument.

re-

exceeds the operating

is

lost.

torted sine

which your instrument

is

indicated

on

o metal tog fastened to the rear

be

changed for either

is

wound with two 117-volt prima in

parallel for 117-volt operation and in se ries

4-volt operation. Since the blower motor is connected

only one of the transfo rmer primaries,

be

covered with another tag whi

r maxi

mum

dependability

to

the Type 519 Oscilloscope should be ne

on

the metal tog located near the power

limits,

waves},

unstable power-supply operation may

the temperature drops to a

in

the Type 519 Oscillo-

from

105

to

125

(234

nominal}.

is

wired

The power trans-

ries

which are

no

change

If

the line volta

volts

at

ar

250

volts

117

- or 234-volt operation

in Fig. 2-2.

is required. When the trans-

and

long life, the line volta

or has o poor waveform

The

the

by

in

ch

ge the

ge

(di

s·

2-2

Fig.

2-2

. Powe r

lrontfo<ll,.r c

onn

ectio

nt

for

ope

rotion

of the Typ e

S19

0 K IIIotcope ot

117

or

234 volh.

@

result. Check for proper line voltages checking for othe r causes of unstable operation.

F

us

e

Requ

irements

When the Type 519

volt

operation, use a 7the instrument 4-omp

slow-blowing

Time

De

A time

of

the instrument for approximately instrument warmup period before the de operating When the oc-power pilot for use.

If

the ac-power normal 45-second delay returns to

amp

is

connected for 234-volt operation, use a

type fuse.

lay

delay

relay used

is

switched on. The relay

is

in

full

operation.

and

waveform before

Oscilloscope

is

connected for

slow-blowing type fuse. When

in

the Type 519

45

allows voltages

light

dims, the instrument is ready

terrupted for only an instant, the

wil

l

occur before the instrument

delays

seconds

a brief

are

117-

operation

alter

tube-

applied.

Dim Adjustment

The

DIM

ADJ.

control

is controls the brightness of the oc-power pilot light after the 45-second worm-up period. Normally, setting which waveform observations

Camera

Bez

When

one Type 519 the bezel supplied on the used. The bezel supplied with the camera the graticule assembly

To

place the Type 519

the

following

1.

Set

the front-panel controls

mentioned may be placed

POWER DIM

ADJ. INTENSITY NORMAL-SINGLE NANOSEC/CM DELAY

MULTIPLIER CYCLES/SEC RANGE TRIGGER GAIN FUNCTION

PULSE

AMPLITUDE

OR

SYNC VERTICAL HORIZONTAL

a screwdriver adjustment which

will

reduce

glare

ore

being mode

el

of the Tektron

properly.

FIRST-T

I

ME

in

procedure

is

suggested:

in

SWEEP

SOURCE

it

is

from the

pilot light

in

a darkened

ix

cameros

is

oscilloscope

OPERATION

operation

lor the first time,

as

follows

any position):

Fully counterclockwise

RATE

Fully

counterclockwise

Fully

adjusted to a

when

ro

used with the

must be

will

not toke

(controls not

Off

Centered

NORMAL

5

Centered

XIOOO

10

STANDBY

GEN.

NORMAL

PULSE

Centered

clockwise

om.

®!

O

pe

2.

(The

line voltage

the factory

Connect

to the source

3.

Set

4.

Allow ing that de operating voltages ment

is

Do

glow

of

the

a

few

5.

Advance the

appears

6.

Adjust the a

small round spot.

7.

Advance the

clockwise

Readjust the

B.

Rotate the

the start of the trace

9. Adjust the parallel

10.

Connect o TSO/N125 nector mated. signal fully.

11.

Connect a 2-nsec 125-ohm of

the

12.

Rotate the counterclockwise display of the Rate the waveform control.

13.

Adjust controls until a sharp trace with tained. These controls nal

signal connectors. SOURCE the input signal to+

or -

lor

is

indicated

th

e power cord to the rear of the instrument

of

power.

the

POWER

switch to

about

45

seconds for the pilot lamp to dim,

ready for use.

not

stationary

near the left center of the

to the horizontal markings of the graticule .

making

If

path remains

adapter

switch to

CRT

CAUTION

turn

the

intensity

surrounds

the

spot

seconds.

INTENSITY

FOCUS

and

PULSE

AMPLITUDE

to obtain a horizontal

INTENSITY

HORIZONTAL

at

AXIS

ROTATION

certain that the

the wrong impedance connectors

open

to the SIGNAL 125 PULSE

AMPLITUDE

and

adjust the

Generator

vertically

the

FOCUS,

are

and/or

trigger may now be applied to the inp

If

externaJ triggers

+

or

-

is

used, set the

INT.

CONTROLS

Intensity

The

INTENSITY the changes ing rate or time bose. The clockwise decrease brightness. INTENSITY the point where the phosphor on the face of

control

oscilloscope

display. Compensation con be mode for

in

brightness resulting from changes

to increase brightness

Care

control that the brightness is not turned up to

rating Information--Type 519

which

th

e instrument is wired

near

the power cord receptacle.)

ON.

are

appl

so

high

spot.

Excessive

may

damage

control until a visible spot

screen.

ASTIGMATISM

OR

sweep

control for suitable trace bright-

positioning control to position

the left marking

control until the trace

adopter

to the +RATE

50-ohm

and the connections

cable

from

n

connector.

OR SYNC

DE

L

AY

pulse

using the

INTENSITY,

adequate

slightly interdependent.

are

used, set the

EXT.

11

internal triggering

TRIGGER

AND

GRATICULE

is

used to adjust the brightness

INTENSITY

and

must

be

taken when using the

indicat-

ied

end

the

that

a

bright

brightness

the

screen

controls to produce

SYNC

control

across the screen.

of

the graticule.

50

0 con-

connectors

are

mated, the

will

not

the

J

25-ohm

control slowly

control until a stable

is

obta

ined.

VERTICA

l

positioning

and

ASTIGMATISM

intensity

An

TRIGGER

SOURCE

in

the

trigger-

control

is

rotated

counterclockwise to

th

e

cathode

instru-

in

locate

is exter-

from

switch

2-3

at

and

fully

is

ore

seat

end

ob-

ut

of

Operating I

nforma

tion--

Type 51 9

(CRT)

becomes permanently

roy tube of the beam should never a bright halo forms around a stationary spot.

The

FOCUS

and clearly defined spot or trace to be obtained. Perhaps the best way to adjus t the is

to display a waveform on the oscilloscope

FOCUS

the

overall focus of the trace.

best a new adjustment of the controls is

changed. The

Oscilloscope

vertical 1-centimeter divisions. The minor division mark ings

on the ho rizontal centerline ore 5 on the vertical cule markings allow accurate time ments to be mode from the oscilloscope screen.

To

screen, loosen the knurled knob located

graticule

Tighten the knob .

position, reverse the process.

The

in

place by four slotted graticule nuts hinge fittings for mounting the viewing hood. the hinge fittings

so that a mounted. The Model to photograph the scope. When the camera

unlatched

ASTIGMATISM

and

ASTIGMATISM

disappearing groticule used with the Type 519

is

accurately marked with 6 horizontal

centerline ore 2 millimeters aport.

move the groticule out of the viewing

and

slide it downward the

To

groticule cover

allow quick removal of the viewing hood

Tek

tronix Model

lost sweeps of the Type 519 Oscillo-

and

swung

damaged.

The

up

to the point where

ASTIGMATISM

and

then adjust

The

and

voltage measure-

area

just

below the

full

length of the slot.

and

is

provided with

In

C-19

camera may be

is

especially designed

it

CRT

screen.

intensity

addition,

be

turned

controls permit a sharp,

FOCUS

and

controls alternately for the

It

may be necessary to make

if

the intensity of the trace

millimeters apart; those

return the groticule to functioning

and

mask

assembly is held securely

C-12

or

C-19 camera

is

not being used,

away

from the

controls

and

groti-

of the

con be

Groticule Illumination

The graticule

is

edge

top below the oscilloscope screen, brighten the groticule markings them.

Camera

A camera jack, marked source for use with is

inserted

loscope groticule lights ore outamotico

illuminated by two lamps located

of the groticule. The

Jac

k

6.3V

a camera. When the camera plug

in

the jack, the

SCALE

and

CAMERA,

ILLUM.

is

rotated clockwise to

counterclockwise to dim

ILLUM.

lly

at

control, located

provides a 6.3-valt

control

and

disconnected.

oscil-

POSITIONING

Two controls,

VERTICAL

and position the trace to the desi red point on the oscilloscope screen. A third positioning control, used to align the trace with the horizontal markings of the graticule.

The

VERTICAL allow the trace to bottom of the screen, or to any intermediate point. The trace

HORIZONTAL,

position control has sufiicient range to

be

positioned completely off the top or

AXIS

ore

used to

ROTATION,

2-4

moves

up

when the control

when the control is rotated

The

HORIZONTAL position control causes the trace to

move to the righ t when

and

to the left when horizontal positioning range of the control meters.

The

AXIS

ROTATION

located between the

This adjustment permits the trace to axis through the center of the screen.

2

is

rotated clockwise

counterclockwise.

it

is

rotated

in

it

VERTICAL

the clockwise direction

is

rotated counterclockwise. The total

control

is

a screwdriver adjustment

and

HORIZONTAL controls.

VERTICAL-DEFLECTION

Signal Input Connection

The

electrical signal to

through a 125-ohm coaxial cable to the SIGNAL

If

the impedance of the signal source

nector.

125 ohms, corresponding cables should

be

used to prevent mismatches tions. The signal posses internally first through o trigger takeoff, then through a 45-nsec delay vertical deflection system of the spot to be deflected nal waveform on the screen as the spot zontally by the horizontal sweep circuits. The vertical size of the displayed waveform con be adjusted to a suitable amplitude by inserting in

series with the signal-carrying cable. Or, bration-Step Generator the vertical amplitude of the waveform can be adjusted by means of the

the

trols.

The

vertical sensitivity of the Type dependent on the adjustment of the high voltage. The risetime of each Type 519 measurements sensitivity measurement con be checked

Calibration-Step Generator.

the

To

check the measurement, connect a 125-ohm cable from

the

OUTPU nector. Set the switch to

lOV

10.00. Adjust the oscilloscope front-panel controls for stable presentation of the step waveform. Adjust the control until the portion of the waveform located 2 nsec after the rise

in

sensitivity the

VOLTS

dial.

For

example,

is

the vertical deflection factor

When connecting the oscilloscope to the connections should be made directly through 125-ohm cables or through suitable impedance matching devices to

SIGNAL

the

be

observed

and

cable

CRT.

vertically. The spot traces out the sig-

Calibration-Step Generator front-panel con-

CRT

mounted

CRT

are

then recorded on the

T 125 0 connector to the SIGNAL 125 0 con -

(CALIBRATION-STEP

TO

125 0

is

exactly one centimeter high. The vertical

volts per centimeter con

if

the

VOLTS

125n

connector. However, when impedance

The signal causes the

external attenuotors or

is

being used

as

in

the instrument

is

measured

at

GENERATOR)

and

rotate the

be

dial shows a reading of

is

8.7 volts per centimeter.

and

is

about

be

rotated

about

SYSTEM

is

applied externally

1250

is

other than

a suitable

and

resulting

to the distributed

is

deflected hori-

an

amplifier

if

the Cali-

the signal source,

519

Oscilloscope

and

sensitivity

the factory. These

CRT

face mask.

at

any

time by using

VOLTS

control to

read directly from

any

signal source,

down

2 centi-

con-

adaptor

refl

on the

The

RANGE

VOLTS

B.70

on

ec-

is

a

,

®

matching devices voltage changes produced amplitude signal to a usable 1250 attenuator source and the SIGNAl be used ind series).

If the signal amplitude

vertical deflection, an external amplifier can be inserted between the signal source However, and output impedance, severe waveform distortion may result. width, or reproduced faithfUlly

In to prevent unwonted reflection of high-frequency waveforms or their characteristic impedances.

under Accessories, part (

Delaying

The signal-delay line which allows sufficient time for the trigger circuits to process the trigger signal and start the sweep before the leading edge of the input signal arrives CRT. seconds extra delay after sweep start and before display of the triggering signal. gering signal

If

may insert additional 125-ohm delay cable, but pense of risetime. after the trigger takeoff point to increase the signal delay. The fixed delay line.

The ment signal. Within can position the waveform horizontally on the screen with spect

For trigger signals, the time relationship of the external trigger signal

ange

r loy signal to the put signal fore the sweep having arrived early, To trigger cable, be of bandwidth due to high-frequency attenuat

The the mately form

are

used,

you

must

consider possible signal

by

is

too great,

connector.

(of

known attenuation factor) between the signal

ivi

dua

if

the amplifier does not provide the correct input

In

addition,

do

not operate linearly, the signal

general, to obtain an accurate waveform display and

of fast-rise pulses, all cables should be terminated

the

Signal

Type 519 Oscilloscope contains a

The

internal delay cable provides about

will

you

wish

the signa/

most common point of insertion

DELAY

control provides a 35-nanosecond adjust-

in

sweep starting time with respect

this

be

used to se lect the display time

to

the trace .

trigge red sweep operation with externally-derived to

the input signal

of the

DELAY

is

introduced by using long cables to couple the trigger

EXTERNAl

will

arrive

is

offs-et

external delay of this type, shorten the external

if

possible.

added

into the signal-carrying circuits, but only with

delay provided

RG-63{U

cables shipped with the oscilloscope

1.2

nsec per foot.

is

displayed on the screen, the amount of delay which

the devices. If the signal

it

will

be necessary to attenuate the

level

before applying

This

con be done

125

lly

or may

is

and

if

the amplifier stages hove limited bond-

on

the

CRT.

4)

Adaptor

At

appear

very near the start of the trace.

to

appear

The

extra delay cable

range of adjustment, the

must

control.

TRIGGER

at

the vertical deflection plates be-

triggered.

will

not If

by

a typical 125-ohm cable such

If

it

to the

by

inserting a

0 connector. Attenuotors may

be

"stocked" (connected

too

low

to

produce sufficient

the

SIGNAL

125

0 connector.

will

An

exception

is

NSO{N125

(page

fixed

45-nonosecond

the slower sweep rates the trig-

farther

to

the right, you

at

must

be

is

at

the

CRT

end of the

to

the triggering

DELAY

and

thus apparently

fall within the adjustment

If,

for

example, too

125

0 connector, the

The

signal input waveform,

be

displayed

on

not

possible, cable can

ion

in

the screen.

the cable.

is

this

is

any portion of the inp ut wove-

described

10

much

SIGNAL

1250

not be

2-11}.

at

nano-

the

added

control

approxi-

loss

®

Oper

ating In

formation--

in

IIIHI I

in

Fi

g. 2-3.

Typic

ger

ing sig n al dela ys.

triggering

de l

either

ru ults dela y.

must

be

added

perly

on

the

ex-

re-

de-

in-

as

the screen con be determined

and the number of divisions that the display If the display trigger cable from

incorrect signal or trigger delays.

When 30-megacycle or higher repetition-rate signals of

identical

shape

l

AY

control waveform. which

one bypassed by direct connections to the sacrifice of internal triggering

Trigge

ring (or Synchronizing) the S

In

most

applications

form

to

appear

the characteristics of the waveform can be examined

As

a necessary condition for this type of display, the

toil. start of each horizontal sweep characteristic of the input waveform. loscope this chronizing the sweep with the displayed waveform or with another waveform bearing a definite time relationship displayed waveform. More information about the horizontal

is

given

sweep the manual.

The following paragraphs outline the operation of the various triggering controls front panel,

TRIGGER

the switch second, and FUNCTION switch third. Finally, the PULSE

AMPLITUDE

a stable displa y for "triggered" sweep operation.

Ia

I

,

fbi

al

wav eforms reoulting fro m

Waveform

lal

ay

or

from too little tri

or subtracted to display the waveform pro-

must

is

required.

end amplitude

will

always permit display of the complete

If

all waveforms ore uniform,

is

displayed.

stationary on the oscilloscope screen so that

is

accomplished either

in

the

in

the order norma

SOURCE

OR

Nsulto fro m

too

little

signal delay.

gg.,Jng

delay

be

moved to the right,

Fig.

2-3

shows displays resulting

ore

being displayed, the

The

internal delay

from

the signal.

it

is

desirable for a repetitive wove-

must

Time

Bose

portion of this

in

the T

RIGGER

JJy

switch would be set

SYNC

control

Type

519

incorNd oignal or

CRT

or

by

the sweep must

less

it

is

if

eith., Wa vefo

too

delay

not lin

desired,

too

rm

much

signal

be

moved.

in

important

e may be

at

trig· much

rote

weep

in

be time-related In by

encountered. Usually,

is adjusted to obtain

to

the Type 519 Oscil-

triggering or

to

section of

section of the

first,

GAIN

syn-

2-5

lb l

the

DE-

the

de-

a

the

For

Operating

Information--Type 519

"synchronized" sweep operation, both the TUDE

OR

SYNC

and

jus

ted to obtain a stable display.

Selecting

The sweep can be either triggered or synchronized [de-

pending upon the setting

following sources:

the nally-derived

(4)

Rote of the advantages

(1)

Displayed Waveform. Triggering from the displayed waveform from

the displayed waveform with the switch set to either the + triggering or connections ore required. A displayed waveform that produces with a time du ration of one nanosecond or more lor

rel

iable triggering.

[2)

Externally-Derived Signal. an external signal, connect the triggering signal to the TERNAL triggering signal with o time duration of 1 nanosecond or more. The mum

amplitude should not exceed ± 2 volts peak except when the external trigger should not exceed

may be attenuated externally. External triggering sig-

gers nals con set to either + preferably should be disconnected TRIGGER gering

is

External triggering provides definite other methods of triggering external triggering, the triggering signal constant source). Also, time

at

forms ample, the external triggering signal waveform to observe the shaping, the signal through the device without resetting the scope triggering controls

(3)

Calib ration-Step Generator. positions of the nal

is

obtained internally from the Calibration-Step Generator. The signal takeoff circuit inserted ator. Therefore, trols which adjust the output amplitude of the Calibration-Step Generator also affect the amplitude of the triggering signal available tions of the

TRIG

of the form which Calibration-Step and

accurately measure shaping, jitter, amplification,

or delay

VERNIER

the

Trigger Source

of the

(I) displayed waveform,

(3)

waveform,

Generator. The trigger source selection

TRIGGER

for certain applications.

is

the method most commonly used. Triggering

is

convenient, since

at

least two trace-widths of vertical deflection

TRIGGER

GAIN switch

be

125 n connector when some other mode of trig-

used to reduce the possibility of stray triggering.

Calibration-Step Generator, or

SOURCE

switch.

INT.

125 n input connector. The external

must

be

at

least

is

set to

used when the

EXT

. o r -EXT. External triggering signals

in

amplitude

and

shape (depending upon the

and

different points

phose relationships between wove-

in

a circuit con

at

the input to o device under test,

jitter, amplification, or delay of

fo

r each observation.

TRIGGER

SOURCE

is derived through the use of a trigger

near

the termination of the gener-

it

is

necessary to keep

at

TR

GER SOURCE

is

at

the + CAL

IGGER

SOURCE

switch ore used to observe a wove-

time-related to the output waveform of the

Gene

rator. It

various points

in

PULSE

controls may be

switch) from

is

trigger source has

TRIGGER

position. Internal

is

in

amplitude,

In

the

X.2

position the

SOURCE

from

the

EXTERNAL

advantages

usually re mains

be

seen. If, for ex-

is

derived from the

it

is

+CA

L.

or

in

mind that the con-

and

- CAL posi-

AMPLI-

(2)

by means

SOURCE

sufficient

switch

possible

SYNC

FUNGION

Each

or -

INT.

no

external triggering signals

To

trigger the sweep from

20

millivolts

X.2.

± 10 volts. Larger trig-

TRI

GGER

certain applications . With

In

the

switch, the triggering sig-

switch. These two positions

is

then possible to observe

the device under test.

exter-

maxi-

over

oscillo-

-CA

2-6

addition, the internal-trigger requirement for o minimum signal height

and

ad-

step generator

BY

.

(4)

GER be v 3 cps to the sweep range. TRIGGER MU

LTI

desired repetition rote.

is

Selecting

The horizontal sweep con ing waveform os determined by the position of the SOURCE

In many applications the triggering polarity since triggering on the wrong slope to display the portion of the waveform which

EX

-

In

many other cases, however, such tive waveforms, the triggering signal polarity important.

Selecting

A four-position GAIN switch permits

is

nals to be attenuated or amplified triggering or synchronization. The X.2, GAIN switch setting to use for reliable triggering, T is

included. Additional information is given AMPLITUDE

TRIGGER SOURCE Switch Setting

RATE

L

±CA

±

± I

tUsed for omoll omplitude tri ggers up

• Colibrotion-Step Appro,;imote ly 2.5 % and -CAL. pooi

••

Voltage

n

Kt

or picked off TRIGGER

In

duration con be circumvented. When the

is

not being used,

Rote Generator. SOURCE

switch provides triggering signals which con

aried

to cover o continuous repetition-role range from

30

kc

. These signals con then be used to trigger

at

o known repeti t

To

select the Rote Generator trigger, set the

SOURCE

VIBRATOR

switch

the

Trigger Polarity

[+slope) or felling

The

switch to

and

[-slope)

RATE

it

should be set on

GEN. position of the

ion

rote within the

RATE

CYCLES/SEC

be

triggered on either the

portion of the triggering

switch.

will

as

the

Trigger

Gain

as

NORMAL,

XS,

and

OR

SYNC

Appro;~~;imole

lour gain settings ore:

X20.

To

aid

control description .

TABLE

2-1

GAIN Switch Settings

X.2 NORMAL

GEN.

L*

EXT

.

NT.**

rang

ore

giYen. Ap proximately 10"/. ond

SOURCE

Always set

BvtoSOv l.Svto

l

vto

10 v

0.2vto2v

(peak)

2v

IOv(pulse) to

{pul

se)

100 v

Generator

output dep amplitudes ore titled.

of th e ste p

of

the

TRIGGER

of

signa

ls oppli e d to the SIGNAl

ed

to

the

switc h.

ampl

+INT.

tions

es

coupl

in

this

position.

[p

eak) 2 v 2 v

to

20v

(pulse) 20 v 20 v

to

200

itude

SOURCE

of

ond -INT

STAND-

TRIG

above

GEN. Then set the

control to the

TRI

GGER

is

important

make

it impossible

is

of interest.

high-frequency repeti-

is

usually

inc

oming trigger sig-

necessary for proper

in

determining which

able

in

the PUL

XS

t X20t

O.Svto

SOv

0.04vto

O.Dlv to

0.4v

to I

0.1

v to

me.

is

coupled to the + CAl.

switch.

125

!l

the sign al omplilude i•

. positions

of

-

ris-

not

2-1

SE

con-

the

®

Selecting

the

T

ri

Three functions the Type 519 gering conditions: They

To determine the best tri cation, it is best be

f

ore

Each ble triggering from a certain t app

lications,

well.

For such applications,

is

simply

The

PULSE a sweep triggered by signals tion rates depending upon the regularity PULSE SW

EEP

events

The occurring 150mc. in

the

SYNC

The

Hf from high-frequency signals 100

me

chroniz

ation SYN

C

position.

Triggering

Th

e

l tion

of

and

VERNIER

two

functions: pulse

tion, depending upon the setting of the

If

the

PULSE

AMP

signal m the set ate

properly triggers must ing

the

Triggering on just short of normally co

ntrol

lktiiiH-

~

F1

g. 2

-4

.Th

of

voltoge Y

gger Function

or

modes of

operation

Oscilloscope

to

are:

gger

to

have

making o selecti

of

the triggering modes

o m

up

mode, when used

feature, permits photographs to be

at

any

SYNC

at

To select this mode, place the FUNC

SYNC

Ia

more than 2 kmc. To use the high-frequency

os

t

controls

the front panel

FUNCTION switch

LI

us

t re

level

Tr

i

gger

the

free runs when the

is

rotated clockwise past

TIMI----------~

euJ

t«

same

on

.

however, more than

atter

of choice.

mode permits choi

to

SO

me.

Th

e upper repetition-

in

setting of the

mode permits s

a const

ant

repetition rote

position.

mode

pe

rm

its

in

mode, place the

or

Synchronizing

normally

are

the

SYNC

controls. These controls

amplitude selection

is

TUDE

OR

SYNC

ach

to init ia

te

ore

rejected.

In

within

its

rotational

be

available

as

Gain. sm

all

signals

point where the sweep free runs. The sweep

uoloJCU1oJcope d !Jplo

UI

time.

are

cover a wide

PULSE,

SYNC,

mode far o

par

understanding of

is

designed to provide

ype

of

waveform.

one

mode

the

triggering mode selected

ce

of

o fr

ee

-runn

at

random or

rate

of

the pulse period.

conjunction w ith the

NANOSEC/CM

tab

le disp lays of wavefo

up

to approximately

the

sweep

to

be

the

range

f

ro

m approximately

FUNCTION

switch

the

Sweep

operated

in the

PULSE

AMP

LI

TUDE

and

FUNCTION

set

to

the

PULS

control

dete

rmines the level o

the sweep.

All

order

for the control

range

, sufficiently Iorge

explained

earlier

is

best when the control

PULSE

AMPLITUDE

the

RECURRENT

y1s

o g rop

hlcolp

range

and

un

made

switch.

TRI

ore

E position, the

triggers below

u

®!

provided

of

trig-

Hf

SYNC.

ti

cul

ar

appl

all

three

for

many

wi

ll

work

in

g sweep

ifo

rm

repeti-

limit

varies,

The

S

IN

GL

of

si

ngle

TI

ON

switch

synchronized

syn-

in

the

GGER sec-

OR

SY

NC

used for

synchroniza-

switch.

to

ope

nde

r

Select-

is

OR

SYNC

arrow.

reJentotlon

Operating

If

the

FUNCTION

switch

HF

SYNC

in

i-

sta-

positi

trol

is

used f ment. Final adjustment may SYNC

control. T the frequency of the triggering signal multiple frequency.

The

VE

RNIER

until

the

coarse

control is

ad

justed to obtain a

on,

t

he

or

mak

in

g the coarse synchroni

he

sweep

SYNC

control

ad

justment is

PULSE

repetition

is

made,

TIME

Horizontal Sweep

or

The T

ype

519 ous signal volt age

E

sented thr

is of the spot bears o d ef

the

rms

The from Ti

l 000 nanoseconds

erator sweep

Hf

Single

enta sweeps so the signal fusion resulting from lure switch must

gle-trigger

tion fully clockwise

r-

gle depressed.

triggered sweep sar

set

Ins is ceived, Each time the repeated

or time the tings of the

3-conductor

ly

of the plug thr button switch jack switch may

Oscilloscope graphically

age

versus t

pr

od

uces vertical deflection of the trace; time

ough

also known

means for making time measurements from the screen.

NANOSEC/

one

of nine accurately calibrated rates a vailable.

me

base

steps r

h

as

been

ca

libration

ime

horizon

ta

l deflection. The

as

the time base, since

ini

te relationship

CM

switch selects the desired sweep

ange

from 2 nanoseconds

(I

p.

sec)

per centimeter. The sweep

des

i

gned

to

and

linearity.

Sweep Operation

The T

ype

519

Oscilloscope

tion

to

be

obta

ined

and

co

n be clearly recorded without

mu

is

selected

in

be

actuated

When

the

and

sw

eep

When the

i

ly

occur immediately after the

tead,

the

armed

and

the sweep runs once

.

When

the

HF

SYNC positi

RESET

The time bose may

open

p

ush-

on

the

in

the

be

used

ltiple traces. The single-sweep

by

plac

ing

the

even

FUNCT

the

PULSE

runs immed iately

PULSE

RE

ready

FU

PULSE

plug

bu

ough and

r

ea SINGLE

to

the

SINGLE

SWE

EP

to

"'

arm··

the lime

t.

I

ON

switch

AMPLITUD

(post

the

RECURRENT

each

AMPLI

TUDE

ope

ration, the single sweep does

ADY

lamp

lights

to

be

triggered. When o trigger is

and

RESET

button

is

NCTION

switch

on,

a single sweep runs immediately

button is depressed regardless of

AMPLITUDE

also

be

supplied

in

the accessory

tton switch.

Connect

o

cable

to the two term inals

ins

er

t the plug into the

r

panel.

W

ith

the

SWEEP

position,

arm

the sweep.

Information-Type

set

to

either the

AMPLIT

UD

be

made

with

rate

wi

is

normally

then the

stable

display.

BASE

presents

(see

Fi

g.

2-4).

horiz to

provide

long-term

permits o single

eliminates

NORMAL-SIN

position. The

base

is

pl

aced

in

E OR

SYNC

arrow

time the

OR

SYNC

RESET

butt

to

indicate

the

RE

ADY

depressed the

is

placed either in t

OR SYNC

reset

externally,

the two center

NORMAL

the

push-button

SYNC

E

OR SYNC con-

zat

i

on

the

ll

synchronize

or

at some

set

at

midran

VERNIER

inst

The signal

horizontal

onta

l

def

time

and

per

centimeter

st

abil

-s

weep

all

subsequent

GLE

RESET

and

permit a

the

PU

L

control

or

line),

RESET

button

control

is

not

on

is

depressed.

that

the

li

gh

t

goes

prO<:ed

he

control.

us

ki

t a nd o

te

on

the

EXTERNAL

-SINGLE

519

or

ad

V

ERN

sub-

SYNC

an

t

an volt-

is

repre-

sweep

lecti

provides

ra

gen

ity

pres-

con lea

SWEEP

buHon

s

SE

posi-

is

a

sin-

set for

neces-

sweep

out.

ure

SYNC

each

the

set-

ing t normal-

rm

i

na

push-

RESET

SW

EEP

switch

2-7

the

just-

I

ER

at

ge

e-

on

te

to

-

of

-

in-

set

is

re-

is

he

ls

Operating

Information-Type

519

-,

-

---

00

NOIMAL

-=>

-----~./

~"':",;,::-;---~--

~=

.

Input

----

\

I

OP'nONAL

,...,.,

Output

circuit directly

loy

do

11

l0

1

I

oxr.

ta

u

"''

•

l1

mal

If

crt

lred

Fi

o oocilloo

th

Synchroscope

the

In

gered

some

in

process

this "synchroscope" application, the sweep is caused to

In free run o r to be triggered by t Genero!or

he

t

from

SOn,

RATE

e the input waveform (see F

at

iti

swe

he

T

FUNCT switch

must be rotated

e sweep

Th

is in e ith

free-running sweeps per second is determined by

NANOSEC/CM

the

of

A free-ru ence trace input signal. point on the

ro-vo

ze

a

Delayed

A delayed triggering +GATE

o

copofordi

Operation

oscilloscope

ual

us

ni

synchro

or

ations it may

lic

app

on

drive

and

the

or

RIGGER

+ T

e

th

or

be

con

ep

switch.

ON

I

lhe

used,

is

fully

runs

ee

fr

SYNC

the

er

ng sweep

nni

the

on

trace con then

The

oscilloscope screen or

refere

ltage

Trigger

connect

n

50

y.

plo

lication,

app

the input wavefor

by

zed

Ro

OUTPUT

mode to

If

PULSE

at

oscilloscope

nc

or of

de

more

be

external circuit

50

the

clockwise or

sw

e

fr

r. T

to

ra

Gene

te

YEO

DELA

the

0,

connect

50

12

2-5}.

ig.

run

ee

fr

sition

po

SE

PUL

LITUDE

AMP

th

post

th

es when

tim

all

positions. The number of

YNC

S

HF

Tobie

to

efer

(r

ch

it

also prov ides o convenient

screen without requ

positioned

be

n

ca

e.

lin

produced

is

pulse

oscillosc

the

sweep

the

m.

sirable to reverse the

oscilloscope.

om the

Calibratio

he

output signal

he

GATE,

+

used

is

or

it

pos

any

in

FUN

the

of

SYNC

OR

RECURRENT

e

TION

FUNC

e

th

.

-21

2

to

used

be

the

at

approx

at

e

op

on

wo

dri

to

Oocilloocopo

519

o Typo

th

ing

S. Us

2-

g.

2-8

rnol

oxto

trig-

is

However,

Step

n-

the +

to

of

ion

CTION

control

row.

ar

sw

e settings

refer-

g

irin

o desired

blish

esta

DELAYED

ately

im

circuit.

outputofth

Tho

OS

NAN

Switch Se

in-

the

of

the time

ch

it

ing pulse with respect and a pulse is produced

just

ad

con be

mea

onds by

on

The output

lanche mode is coupled

SOURCE

RIGGER

T

he

nector. T

min

no

tude is

nanoseconds. A typical Rate Generator waveform

10

on

ed

display

cuil

lclr

no

lr

xl

oo

TABLE

M

/C

EC

gs

in

tt

10

20

50

00

1

200

500

000

1

The

.

rt

sweep sta

the time that the trigger

to

the +

at

a range of approx

over

ed

control.

LAY

DE

of the

ns

GENERATOR

RATE

lse from a transistor operating in

pu

the

to

and

ch

it

sw

less than

is

pulse risetime

s,

t

vol

+15

ally

the Type 519 is shown in

nappl

ho

lst

2-2

Adjusted

delay of

GGER

I

TR

GEN. position of the

RATE

he

t

to

0.8

duration

and

to th

iod

kc

400

to

kc

200

kc

100

kc

50

kc

20 JOke

Skc

2kc 1 kc nomi

delayed

e

th

50

ately 35

im

RATE

+

nanosecond,

approximate

is

. 2-6.

Fig

is

n

To

inputol

o

nominal nominal nominal nominal nomin nomi

min

no

trigger-

accepted

connect

nanosec-

e

th

n

50

ampli -

use the

na

ava-

con-

al

l

al

l

or

ly

as

2NSfC

/

CM

Fig.

2-6

. Typical Rate Ge n

onth

• Typ•

Rate Generator, set the RATE

GEN. controls for the desired repetition rate. tween

3

cps and

of

10"/o.

Since

the sweep can

set by the

ture can

be

previously under the headings

Source

'"

,

and Generator the

MULTIPLIER

possibility

of stray triggering.

CALIBRATION-STEP

Step

Waveform

Th

e step waveform fr

is

generated by discharging a charged coaxial

Tr

tTh complet•

Toke

offcanb

• d

from

Ullld

in

Fig.

2-7

.

location

n

etw

orkandtriggertakeoff

5190scillolcop

Then

30

Rate

Generator

used for

"Synchroscope

is

not

used, it should

switch

ig

g

11

r

e

th• Typ •

oth

11

r

125

s

of

er

at

or

output

e.

TRIGGER

ad

just

the

CYCLES/SEC

kc

can be selected within

be

triggered

from

app

lic

at

ions such as those described

Opera

to

th

e

OFF

om

the

Calibratio

Trigger

di

1

conn

•

ct·

!hot

519

and

cabl

-ohm

IYS•

the

Calib«rtion-5

.

waveform

SOURCE

at

3 cps to

"Selecting

tion".

be

turned off

position

GENERATOR

ad

e

may

te

p

Gen

as

di1play

switch to

and

MU

L

TIPLIER

Any

frequency

an

accuracy

the repetition rote

30

kc,

this

the

Tr

igger

When the Rate

by

placing

to

reduce the

n-

Step

Generator

line

d

itional

charg

be

add

11

d.l

er

ator

line

charging

Operating

an external load through a magneticaJiy-operated

reed switch.

The

physical determines the duration the Type 519, with no external charge line duration of the constant-amplitude portion of the step

equal to twice the transit time of the built-in l

ine.

[Trans

it

time of the charge for a signal to pass Fo

r the 1.5-nsec cha r

pulse

is

3 nsec.

an additional length of charge line (cab

to the Charge

ed

Ta

keoff (see F

ig

added, the charging network and the charging voltage

be disconnected.

end of the

added

Calibration-Step

be-

519

Oscilloscope

length of the cha rged

of

the output step waveform.

from

one end of the line

ge

line, then, the duration of the output

To

obtain a longer duration step waveform,

Line

Connector

7]

. When

They

must

charge line. A

appears

in

located next to

an

then

Fig.

. 2-

Generator waveform as seen

fea-

8J'lll

Fig.

2-8.

Typi

cal

Calibratlon-St•p

Ge n

on

th

e Type

pl

•

tely

e

liminat

trac

•s,

th

ere

i

nt

o

for

Polarity

Step

polar polarity of the step th

e polarity of the char

GER

SOURCE

POLARITY

switch for normal trigger

Amplitude

The

step amplitude charging voltage used. the charging source 2 times the step voltage present connector when driving step voltage reading of

th

e

RANGE

When the switch permits a choice of two 10

val"

or 1 volt. When the

1

OV

TO

e

125

ohm

load. When

500

position, a T nected to the step into a

The

scale of the

the two above

50

519

e

e,

ity

V

n

OUTPUT

Oscillo s

reed

so

metim

is

swi

tch

and OLT

position,

SO/

ohm l

RANGE

er

cop

e.

It

Is

switch

multiple

es

will

occur

selected

by

the

ot

the output connector is the some os

ge

voltage. The setting of the

sh

ould

agree

is

dependent upon the amount

The

char

ge

at

the instant of

an

external

is

accurately indicated

VOLTS

controls.

S control

is

set to 1 full

RANGE

10

vol"

is

th

e

RANGE

switch

T12

5 adopter

1

25

n

connector

oad.

VOLTS

control, when used with either of

switch positions, indicates the step

Information-Type

added,

1.

5-nsec charge

line

is the time required

to

the other.)

le)

may be

th

additional charge line

be

2-8.

ator

not

contact

in

e Trigger

connected to the open

typical

display of the

on

the Type

I

wa

n form a s

di

always

po

ssi

bl

e

bounc

e.

htran

the

di

s

play.

POLARITY

switch.

with

th

e set ti

ng

in

g.

vo

lta

ge

obtained fr

re

ed switch closure is

at

the

OUTPUT

125

-ohm load. by

the settings

0.00,

the

RANGE scale step amplitudes, sw

itch

is

placed

produced across a

is

set

in

the 1

must

be properly con-

to

obtain o

added

s

pla

to

TRIG-

of the

12

in V 1-v

519

dry-

line

must

ye

com-

eou s

The

om

5 The

the

125

TO

2-9

In

the

is

d

of

n

-

olt

519

Type

Information--

rating

e

Op

1

to

0

the

is

control

VOLTS

he

T

amplitude.

two ranges.

the

When the

the step amplitude may be preset

any

to

trol 50 volts amplitude of the step for trol, apply connector through a 125-ohm needed)

ude

it

ampl multiply oscilloscope

Adjusting the Drive

Two front-panel controls, trol the ore adjusted with a m

just the two controls, they

ad

To counterclockwise.

brates (makes a buzzing sound). Advance the

vi

reed QUENCY

the control

ate

rot operating clockwise while

find

to

forth nant frequency point where the reed

oreo

tional operation

ted to obtain the most

us

j

ad nant frequency of the reed. When adjusting the

use enough drive

trol, contacts. T

the range of 700

within

reed

The chosen

high

he

T result in a

reed

the

when

used.

itch

sw

RANGE

uncolibrated amplitude from

when driving a 125-ohm food. To determine the

the step waveform from the

SIGNAL

the

to

the vertical

of

the distance measured by the sensitivi ty of the

(ond attenuation

and

movement of the dry-reed switch.

cause the reed to moke-ond-breok contact

to

mum of contact bounce.

ini

advance

Then

the reed fails

until

control

slightly Slowly rotate t

n.

i

aga

rotating the

e resonant frequency

th

found when the

is

will

FREQUENCY

the

of

and

DRIVE

the

to

resonant frequency of most reeds

he

used

switches

the

produce

to

requirements

lifetime. To

short

th

t

se

switch

Calibration

the

VAR

he

set to t

is

e

th

by

to approximately

0

he

t

of

setting

any

(o

cable

connector. Meosure the

Q

125

in centimeters and

deflection

used).

if

nd ottenuator,

Frequency

FR

and

DRIVE

first

must

DRIVE

the

opera

to

counterclockwise

VE control counter-

DRI

he

control bock

FREQUENCY

e reed. The

th

of

is

ve

i

dr

only

in

vibrate

control range. For optimum

controls

FREQUENCY

waveform

stable

get solid closures

800 cps.

to

NOTE

of

e RANGE switch

Step

-

in

best

se

the

Generator

T

the possible

switches exte

ype

nd

VA

OUTPUT

EQUEN

control until the

to

decreased

one

to is

ACCESSORIES

(Fig.

ore

ava See also

2-9}

or

e me

typ

il

able

is

to

an,

to

Osci

re

o Section 7,

suppli

terminate

'Terminated"t

'

ll

The which o optional accessories which

specific application notes.

by

sories.

1 l

I

he

T

for the

ohm cable.

• The means

in

re

n Termination

125

250

1

9P-A

T51

"T"

letter

Terminat

"Nat

with the Type 519

cluded

Termination

CRT

an

in

ed ".

termination

information pertains

following

adaptor

2-10

multiplier for

position,

ABLE

I

con-

RIABLE

con-

VARIABLE

5

12

con-

CY,

contro

ese

Th

fully

preset

be

FRE-

then

and

te

start the reed

and resoto

small rota-

then

ore

reso-

the

neor

con-

DRIVE

of the reed

usually

is

ore

519

waveform.

frequently

of

life

the

STANDBY

being

not

the accessories

oscope. O ther

accompanied

Acces-

a spare

as

ed

125-

any

"N"

125R

CONNECTOI

n

if

Construction

.

2-9

Fig.

ls

o

Con

2-10.

Fig. twolypicalapplicationsforthioadaptor.

Adaptor

121

adapt

is

Th

loss

um

m

50-ohm line

loss

minimum

a shunt

of

posed

presents

or

ot

he

t

tion",

going from

described lat

adaptor

volt

signal

the

e primary

Th

signals

receives

Adaptor

131

adapto

This

and

adaptor

l use t

actua input impedance present a

Terminotion.

12Srl

the

of

.

Adaptor

Tl2S

/

TSO

•

th

of

ruction

st

1125*

/

150

is commonly known

2-10)

Fig.

(

or

. Designed to match between a

pod

matching

and 125-ohm

reflections.

and

a series resistor. Though the

and

o correct impedance match

tage

vol

signal

50

to

5 ohms

12

In

.

er

iss

transm

age

of the

age

t

advan

into either end without producing reflections.

ottenuator presents

he

t

line,

a network

ins

ta

con

It

less

is

T50/T125

50

than t

o

adapto

hms

"in

he

transmission factor

ohms

going from

ion foetor is approximately

TSO/N12S

50-ohm

called o

usually

r is

circuitry

the internal

83.3-ohm resistor

he

the load. The combined resistances

of

input impedance of

total

shown

is

shunted by

is

50-ohms

in

as

either

0.225

of

NSO

to 125

is

r

termination

. 2-1

Fig

125-ohm

the

the signal

to

a

allenu-

direc-

/N125

ohms,

0.564.

th

1.

mini-

com-

at

in

it

In

®

SO

!1

CO

N

~CTO

R

(\

8

3.3!l

o

\

F

ig.

2-

cotion

for

The

wove signals originating from o

generally to

50-ohm for the 125-ohm connector. When a connect a nector, the signal voltage cable is has

50 Any reflections from the would return through the delay line nonterminating end of the CRT

90

141

Adaptor

Also

2-

1

2)

is line directly to a for

pulse

the

50-ohm increases 1.43 times tion

at to

SO

results. Since VSWR

SO

C

ON

N~T

F

ig

.

2-12.

isotypico

lsC.TYPE-

I

SHU

NT

R

~S

I

S

T

O

I I

I,}_

11

. Const ruction

this

odoptor

adaptor

used to handle a signal tra veling

direction, since

50-ohm

fully

nsec of delay before it

to

100

called

a stroight-thru connector

applications.

the end of the

ohms, approximate

This

it

is

a nonterminoting unit,

when used with high-frequency sine waves.

Q A

OR

,'~

":

1/

\L

Const

l oppllco

R

________

_

S

I

GN

of

the T

SO/N

12S

is

olso shown.

. is designed to handle pulse or

it

does not provide o termination

signal to the 519

is

terminated. The vertical deflection system

nanoseconds after the original signal.

NS

on unterminoted

end of the

is

more than for any of the other adaptors.

-

-----

:

___

-S

ru

ction tl

o

unchanged

is

CRT,

its

connections, or termination,

T50{N125

O/

N12

5

adaptor,

12

5-ohm line.

This

If

o

pulse

from

adaptor,

at

the 125-ohm end due to the

50-ohm system.

ly

a

BA

UPT7

1S O

---

-

-----

IGN

AL

-

of

the NSO/ N

nf

or th e

odop

tor.

AL~

Adoptor. A

50-ohm

TSO/Nl25

signal

terminated

and

to

th

wh

i

ch

connects a unit 50

ohms

the p

In

0.572

transmission factor

it

will

NTIN

UITY

-----\C,

______

I25

A

do

To

TypeSI9

SIGNAL

Connector

typlcol

oppli·

continuous-

source.

It

is

in

the 125-ohm

is

used to

input

and

the signal

in

125 ohms.

reflect from the

reappear

at

is

accessory

50-ohm

is

used prima r

is

appl

ied

uls

e

amp

litude

reflec-

going from 125

produce a high

T

oTypeS19

SIGNAL 12S Q

Connector

J

=:

Pul

se

Ou

rotion

Coble Length =

12S

~

C

:

I

/

pl

o

r.

Also 1hown

Ope

rating

Information-Type

When the

adaptor

is tinuity inhe rent which may interfere with the displayed waveform

12S

!1

certain precautionary measures reflection from occurring on the displayed waveform, th

e electrical length of the cable supp lyi equal to or more than T {2, where T is the length of the pulse to be observed. after the displayed

SIGNAL

DIREC

50

n

to

.564

1.000

not

Not Used

1.43

1.58 Theore tical

con-

(5)

125

This

unit

each end

the

smell

components to cover permits vides minimum discontinuity 125-ohm

(or components such as d iodes or transistors. used

fo

(Fig

ily to

.j

fl

TO

r testing or design of networks such as filters,

.

otors, impedance-matching circu on ampl ifiers

it

unnecessa impedance matching. be mounted

of the 125-ohm system.

For

series tests, the effective impedance of the test

cu

it

is

2Zo.

ance

is

~/2.

measurement while a test from center conductor to ground

62.5-ohm equivalent source resistance. The tions assume proper te r tions from the test point.

I

6 )

125

The 125

sil

vered-cera mic, wafer-type

with the inner conductor. ·A inductance

R

the capacitor.

This

unit signals to the Type 519 tio

ns.

low

acte

ristics ore: Coupling Capac

used for pulses,

in

the

unit

causes a reflection to occur

are

The

reflection

waveform.

TABLE

2-3

SI

GNA

L VO

LT

TRANSM

TION ADA

1

25

n

Inse

rt

io

is

a

hoUow

and

access holes located on each side to permit

adequate

SO-ohm,

and

m

ry

to use o chassis with long leads

in

the

For

shunt tests, the effective test circuit

Thus,

is

with

!1

Coupling

!1

Coupling Capacitor

is

supplied by the conductors butt-soldered to

{See

is

normally

-frequency

AG

IS

SION FACTO

PT

OR

TYPE

T50/T125

TSO/Nl25

N50/T125 NSO

/N125

Maximum Power

Transfer

n Unit

tube with 125-ohm connectors on

be

mounted inside. A snap-on sleeve shielding of components

in

the line. The unit fa

if

desired) connections for pulse testing

its

, etc.,

any

other devices . The device makes

Instead,

the components or circuit con

small

insertion unit

for tests using

250

ohms equivalent series resistance

min

ation impedances

Capacitor

capacitor slight amount of compensating

Fig.

2-

1

3).

used

fo

r ac-coupling high-frequency

Osci

ll

oscope

si

gna

ls

and

de ore blocked.

it

ance:

O.Ql

GMV.

th

e abrupt

discon-

taken.

To

prevent a

ng

the

adaptor

w

ill

th

en

appear

E

RS

SIGNA L

DI

RECTION

1

25

n

to

son

.225 Not

Used

.

400

.sn

.

633

and

cil

It

con also

ottenu-

and

measurements

and

used os part

cable, a series

above in

both

connected

with minimum

±20%,

imped-

is

with a

in

Its

0.00821-'f

125-ohm

connector contains a

,uf

unl

make

itates

condi-

direc -

series

reflec-

char-

2-11

519

ess

pro-

be

poor

cir-

Operating

Information--Type

125 0

CONNECTOR

\ rr

_____

tl

[

._!..

_____

Construction

Fig.

Voltage

Roling: Reflections: low-Frequency Cutoff

in1250:

171

125 0 1

KMC

The

125

Q 1

which checks of the Calibration Procedure section of this manual.

KMC

con be used to make periodic sweep calibration

2-

519

CENTEI

CONDUCTOR

IUTT·SOLDEIED

TO

CAPACITOR

\.

lr-=--v

L~

vvv

_ _

¥---____

SllVEIED

CEIAMIC

WAFB·TYPI

CAPACITOR

of the

12SQ Coupling

400

volts.

Negligible.

Approximately

Timing

Standar

Standard

d

is

a Sweep Calibrator

Timing

ond 5-nanosecond/cm rates. Refer to the

J

Copodtor.

125 9

CONNECTOR

/

65 kc.

(

81

125

Q Delay

Cables

Different lenglh cables are supplied

the signal

and/or on the front panel of the Type 519 Oscilloscope. per foot of time marked on each cable to

(9)

f

101

Two for erator. nance section of this manuaL

trigger

RG-63/U

cable

travel

from

one end of the cable

125 Q Cable

Connector

{a)

Double Button Assembly. aged

or

worn insert

connectors or cable connecto

b)

Panel Adaptor Assembly. Replacement

{

the front-panel 125-ohm connectors.

{c)

125 n Coble Connector. Replacement cable connectors.

Reed

Switch

spore reed switches

the reed switch used

To

replace the reed switch refer

for

to

the appropriate input connectors

is is

in

use

0.06 db ot 1

kmc.

the time required for o signal

to

the other.

Parts

Used

for

replacing a dam-

any of the 125-ohm front-panel

rs

.

for

ore

included as replacements

in

the Calibration-Step Gen -

to

in

coupling

The

delay

for

ony of

any of the

the Mainte-

loss

2-12

SECTION

APPLICATIONS

3

Introduction

Information

presented been selected 519

Oscilloscope. urements of other

applicat out the various the number of beyond the scope of this of the

most

Vo

lt

ag

e

Measurements

Vertical displacements

t

he

applied signal voltage

ti

on

factor

the indic

ated

rate

voltage

The

accura Type 519 depends to a vertical

measurements

It

is

important to obtain

possible,

for accurate measurements to be made.

must

be

us

in

to show

typical applications

Among

voltage,

time, and frequency.

ions

o

re

described and

fe

atures designed into the instrument.

app

lications

manuel

general applications.

on

ind

ic

ated

on

the

deflection

foetor

measurements

cy

of the

vo

ltage

ore

made

ed

so that the

wid

VEUICAL

DEflECTION

IN

CENTIMETEIS

this

section of

th

e

manual

th

ese

for the Type

the

by

means of the

CRT from

measurements made with the

large

sufficient

th of the trace

for the Type

applications

are

il

lust

rated

519

is

to

cover more than o

CRT

screen

ere

vertical deflec-

face

mask.

it

By

is

possible

to

the

oscilloscope

extent

on

how

on

the oscilloscope display.

ve

rtical deflection,

is

not

X

Fig.

3-1.

Meo11Jring

In

make

the

meas-

addition,

to point

Since

large,

it

accu-

screen.

accurately

Also,

care

included

YIITICAL

fACTOI

voltogu

has

is

few

to

if

DEFLECTION

from

in the measurements. ently

mode

the top, center

for

one reading,

ings.

To

make a voltage

low

ing

method can be used

1.

By

in

centimeters between the appropriate two points

the waveform.

2.

Multiply factor and obtained or

amplifiers

age

difference between the two points

waveform. As

an measure a points on deflection then,

1.2

volts

per centimeter gives a product of figure

multiplied

actual volt

the

oscilloscope

All

measurements

from

the some point on the trace; for

or

bottom.

If

the center of t

it

should be used

using

th

e

graticule,

the

vertical

by

the attenuation f

by

the

amplification

are used).

exampl

e,

assume that

vertical

distance of

th

e waveform.

factor

is

8.7

centimeters

multiplied

by the attenuation factor of 5 gives the

age

difference of 52.2

X

display

.

measurement

{see

measure the

di

stance

The

Also

volts

per centimeter.

for

on

Fig.

by

ac

factor

figure obtained

us

ing

1.2

centimeters between

assume that the

by a

deflection

volts.

all

a waveform, the

3-1).

the

tor; divide the resu

{if

a

should

be

consist-

example

he

trace

is

successive reed-

vertical deflect

vertical deflection either attenuation

is

the

on

the displayed

5X

ottenuotor,

vertical

In

this case

foetor of

10.44 volts.

used

vo

tw

This

3-1

fol-

ion

on

lt

-

you

o

B.?

Applications-Type

519

13H3

Tim@

Measurements

Due

to

the calibrated linear sweep rates of the Type 519 Oscilloscope, any horizontal distance sents a definite the time between two displayed events con measured directly urements c

1. Using the groticule, measure the horizontal distance

setting

4 centimeters between the two desired points.

interval per centimeter or

known interval of t

from

the oscilloscope screen.

on

be

mode as follows (see

in

centimeters between the two displayed events whose

you

time interval

2.

Multiply the distance measured by the setting of the

NANOSEC/CM switch For

wish

and

that

you

then 4 cen timete

40

nanoseconds.

to

example, assume that t

is

10

is

11

X

Fig. 3-2.

MeOt

llringthelim

on

the screen repre-

ime.

Using this

be

accurately

Time

Fig.

3-2):

to

find.

obtain the actual time interval.

he

NANOSEC/CM switch

measure a horizontal distance of

rs

multiplied

by

10

nanoseconds

The

1--•··-----l

Fi

g.

3-3.

ampl

3-2

Meo tl.trlng the fre

e thow•

12

cycles in 5

q1.1

ency

centimele

of

o re pe

titiu tignol

rt.

by

1

e be lween

two

evenh

on

the ot

clllonope dltplo

y.

Frequency Measurements

By

using the method described

vals, the period

feature

waveform con be measured. form

meas-

reciprocal of the period. Frequencies which may be measured with the 519 using mately

of a recurrent wavefo

to nanoseconds, or

cribed the number of cycles of the input waveform tha t are

displayed

time

the frequency of the input waveform. 10 displayed with o 60-mc input signal, 2

co~.tnlinSJ

the

numb

(time

required

con then be easily calculated since frequency

200

be 5 nanoseconds, the frequency

Another method which

as

follows:

in

nanoseconds per centimeter,

er

of

eyel

this

kc

to

over 1000 me.

rm

is

accurately measured and found

200

me.

is

At

any given oscilloscope sweep rote,

5 centimeters of the screen

=

fllQUENCY

et

which ore dit

ploy

for

measuring time inter-

for

one cycle) of o recurrent

The

frequency of the wave-

method range

frequently preferable

For

example,

is the

reciprocal of 5

is

At

o sweep role of

for

example, 3 cycles ore

1

/

2

ed in 5 ce ntimet

from

if

dependent

cycles

en.

is the

approxi-

the period

is

d~

with

on

o

50-mc signal,

and 2

cycles

with a

40-mc

input

vt

il

iz

ing

the pattern of these observations the frequency of a

waveform can be

cycles by

the factor given

Fig.

3-3). factor, freqvencies can easily be determined by this method once the are known. the

reciprocal

5 centimeters.

1. permits played.

2.

Cavnt

displayed

3.

Mvltiply

foetor far the sweep rote being used.

As

nanoseconds per centimeter, 3.2

centimeters.

5 nanoseconds

5 nanoseconds). or

multiplied by

Measuring Diode Switching

Dynamic test measurements con be mode with the Type 519 sw

itch addition, diodes con be ticul

ar cuits ore may be used os o

Th

e fi circuit can In

this abruptly diode. diode as o function of time. found by

125

the recovery time of the diode can be

meosvred

in

5 centimeters

Since each sweep rate has a fixed

multiplication

The

of the time reqvired for the sweep to move

The

Place

the

several cycles

the number of

in

5 centimeters.

the number of

on

example, ossvme

The

40

FREQUENCY

NANOSEC/CM

Switch Setting

10

20

50

100 200

500

1000

by counting t

on

the screen, and

in

Table

3-1

factors for the various sweep rates

appropri

ate

mvltipliers ore

method can

NANOSEC/CM

be

switch

of the input waveform

cycles of the waveform that o

cycles

that with o sweep rote of 5

foetor for o sweep rote of

40

megacycles.

or 1

TABLE

3-1

MUL

TIPLI

CATION

5

CM

INTERVAL

cycles

2B

multiplication

is

the reciprocal of

megacycles,

FOR

2

5

Characteristics

in

ing and storage times

response characteristics.

illustrated

rst

lest circuit for diodes

be

used to

circuit, the

shut off the

The

oscilloscope displays

from

the

ohms.

in

semicondvctor diodes.

selected

Two

here

to

demonstrate how the

pulse

generator and

is

measure

diode reverse recovery

Calibration-Step

fo.ward

current passing through the

The

display

by dividing the waveform voltage

From

the

displayed

signal.

he

number of

multiplying

for

that sweep rate (see

mul

tiplication

fovnd

by taking

svmmorized

as

at

o setting

to

by

the

mult

iplicat

ore

displayed

25

nanoseconds

Th

e frequency

megacycles.

FACTORS

Multiplication

Foetor

(megacycles)

100

40

20

10

4

.4 .2

t

he

nanosecond region

Oscilloscope

basic diode test

oscilloscope

ind

ic

ator

vnit.

in

Fig.

3-4.

to study

ond compared for

shown

Generator is used

th

e current through the

current

values

ore then

waveform

on

the

measvred.

follows:

which

be

(5

times

is

time.

By

this

dis-

re

ion

Fig.

in

5

tim

e.

obtoinoninvert

.r

POSITIVI:

WAVEFORM

3-4.

250

If

de

S

TEP

-ohm

sl

..

d,

e

ddisploy

From

CAUBRATION-

STEP

GENERATOR

OUTPUT

c~

...-

_d

I I I I I I I I I I I I

I

I I I

125-o~m

~

"circuit

the

diod

e

ond

.

125

I I

ITo

I I

I

I I

I

:

I

L-~-~

-

c~~

for

m•

pulse

3.2

+50mo

1------1

OIOD~

aECOVUY

TIM

E

Fig.

3-S.

Typical re

verse

recovery

u

pP'r

trace

s

hows

which

Is

u

5e

d

to

tra

u shows

the

..

covery waveform.

The

resistors

throvgh

the diode. These resistors and the 125-ohm inpu t

impedance of the

47

ma

when

vsed

power dissipated

In

vertical

par-

This

CRT

cir-

to

deflection

least 30

mo.

Th

construct the system.

A

variable

de

5 or

10

ma

of

fo.word

mum

forward

cvrrent

rating, but

also

the 1.8 watt rating of the 125-ohm termination resistor

nected

at

the

neck

the

CRT

termination resistor

A

typ

ic

al

reverse recovery waveform is shown

The

trace wos obtained when o positive-going

applied

from

the

transi

only

the

Colibrotion-Ste p

"

te~blbh

the

inillol

vsed

in

the

circvit

oscilloscope

with o

+50-volt

is

2.35

wotls. A convenient

is

obtained with a forward

e shortest

possible leads

svpply

may be used

cvrrent. Keep

must

not only be within the lest diode

within resistor dissipation ratings,

of the

CRT.

should

Co

fi

brolion-Step Generator to a TI2G

Applications-Type

0

......

Tood

DC

P

ow.,

setforwordc

7----

osuring

polarity

justoble

Supply

470!J,2W

4700,2W

--

diod•

ur.-.ntl

moy

12591nput

••v eru be reversed

I I

DIODE/

TUINED

SW

EEP

lAT

E:

10

ent

foro

T12G

Generator

"vern

curr•nt

set the

lo.word

set the

fo.word

power

svpply; toto[

cvrrenl of

must

to

supply multiples

in

mind

that the

Steady current flow

never exceed

To SIGNAL

c.....m.

I

~

I

l

I I t I I I I I

_ J

I

__

:..J

DiocHUnder

.

..

"covery

OFF

NSEC/CM

diode.

wov• form

.

Th

• l

current

current ot

amovnt

be used to

maxi-

incl

vding

through

120

mo.

in

Fig

. 3-5.

pulse

519

Th

ower

con-

was

3-3

to

•

of at

of

Applications-Type

.r:

STEP

WAYEFORM

Fig.

3-6.

Test circuit for mea suring the

desired, the

diode and

in~erte

d

dis

play

.

519

To

SIGNAL

125

!Jinplt

eo-..

I

I I

:

I

pul

se

polarity

mayb

turn-on

:il

Diode Under

.

time

e reve rsed

II II II II II II

I I

...

-:-

of o diod

to

obtolnon

IMPEDANCE

OHMS!

I

•.

If

test diode. A volts lish trace shows the diode recovery while the upper trace cates the reverse current caused by the positive-going step waveform when the diode the diode shorted out, the step waveform the desired initial turn-off current during diode

!+50

appl the diode reoches essentially zero or a predetermined value

of current

to turn the diode To the Calibration-Step Generator connected directly across the

diode

in Fig. erated disconnected. The fact that the voltage across the diode

does the impeda nce as a function of time con be determined scope display

where A = V

stant while V1 varies considerably with time. A plot of the

diode impedance as a function of time obtained

recovery waveform and the above equation

Fig.

Fig.3-8.

de

supply voltoge of approximately

is conn

ected to the diode through

a forward reference current

rn

a in the example). The time required

ic

ation

of

the switching pulse

is

the reverse recovery time

The

second diode test cir

turn

A typical resultant waveform obtained when the Tl2G

on

the diode, o positive-going step

is

being turned

3-7

(o).

The

upper waveform

by

the Calibration-Step Generator with the diode

not

drop to zero is due to the forward drop acr

of

the diode. The dynamic diode impedance

by

as show n

1/V1

3-7

{b).

Turn-on

of

-50

is

shorted out temporarily. With

until

the current through

for

that diode.

cuit,

shown

so

the turn-on time con be measured.

to

the diode when

125-

ohm

coaxial cable.

on

is

shown by the lower

is

the step pulse gen-

means

of

the following equation:

Z

=2;12~~)

in

Fig.

3-7.

curves

for

other diodes ore shown

940

ohms to estab-

mo. The

is

in Fig.

is

applied

from

V1

is

-50

lower

ind

adjusted lor

re

covery

from

3-6,

is

used from

it

woveloriT'

the oscillo-

almost

using

is

shown

con-

3-4

i-

"

the

o

upper

hown

on

nME

!NANOSECONDS!

tum-on

curve for a trGce ohowo of

impedance

in

lot.

curv

es

for

the

Callbrotlon-St

~euus

~orlous

TI2G

diode on

• p G• ne rotor

time constructed from

typet of

diodes

the

.

is

Fig.

3-7. Cal

Typical

tower

trac

e. The

wa

veform.

tbl A plot

the

turn-on

oss

the

in in

cur~•

Fig.

3-8.

Typlcol turn-

®

12

COAXIAL

Fig.

3-9.

Connec

tion

of

o test

device Into th e

Impedance

Measurement by

A

clear

picture of possible by the presence of discontinuities along a transmission determined while the oscilloscope

The on devices and cables. device bration-Step Generator while the output of the step erator of the inserted device increase the t Step Generator waveform remains constant. However, the inserted device hove a constant impedance, then irregularities can to determine the impedance of the inserted device determine whether this impedance played waveform for the inserted device.

fig. connected

use

display.

Calibration-Step Generator of the Type 519 provides

excellent

means

for

is

connected

as

is

applied to the

im

e that the ampl

will

fi

.Tl

3-10.

Wav

1form

obtain

01

part

of

the ch

Reflection

transmission-line

is

characteristics is made

of the Type 519 Oscilloscope. line

is

under study

measuring the impedances of certain

In

on application of

part of the charge line lor the

oscilloscope is

exactly

not

exactly

also indica te double the delay time

input.

12

5 ohms,

it

ude of the

125

is

constant.

line

by

means of the

this

sort, the

If

the impedance

it

will Ca

li

ohms or does

The

lll

ed

when

a

secti

on

of

50

-

f

or

the

Calibration-St

ohm

arge

line

can be

merely

bration-

be

and

cob

ep Ge n-

UNDER

TEST

5-0

HM

CAlLES

c

har

ge

line

of

the

Calibration-St

ep

G

en

e

rator.

The

test device,

such nector assembly, or a delay line, can be connected into the charge line of the Calibration-S t shown

in erator waveform is

connected into the charge line of 125-ohm cable. T 50-ohm

section of the waveform due the

Calibration-Step

cable

is

from

the

cable used

In

Fig. waveform the device that generated that portion.

if

of an unknown device con thus the amplitude of the portion of the Calibration-Step erator waveform produced by the initial portion due to the 125-ohm system. is generally limited tions ore losses.

If

we

call

Y

and the

0

then the impedance of the inserted device formula:

In

Fig. Using

this

of

50

ohms used

It

is

essential in applications of the type described here

that

no

shorts, terminations, terminated adaptors, or

ato

rs

having

the cha

rg

Cali-

gen-

used

le is

The

not

to

dis-

as a piece of cooxial cable, a

Fig.

3-9.

is

twice the delay time of the

pic

t

ure

is

approximately

3-

10

the relative amplit ude of the portions of the

bear

a definite relationship to the impedance of

small,

due to multiple reflections and reflection

the amplitude produced amp

litude produced

3-10

the ratio of

in

the above formula gives the

low

e line of the Calibration-Step Generator.

ep

In

Fi

g.

3-10

is

shown when a length of

he

portion of the waveform due to the

nearly 1%

times os high as the portions

to

the

12

5-ohm cables.

Generator waveform due

that the t

rue

delay time of the

12

nsec.

be

it

to

the

first

reflection,

Z = 125(2

~~

Yo

to

produce

th

e waveform.

shunt resistance to ground

Applications-Type

Generator

in

the Calibration-Step Gen-

by

the manner

50-ohm

in

series with two lengths

cab

measured by comparing

against the amplitude of

by

the inserted device

-

1}

Yx

is

cable

The

duration of

to

the 50-ohm

le so

it

is

evident 50-ohm

The

impedance

The

method

un

le

ss

the

devia-

the 125-ahm system

is

given

by

approximately

co

rrect impedance

ottenu-

ore

used

If

devices

Gen-

3-5

519

con-

Yx,

the

0.7

.

in

Applications-Type

such

as

from

charging prevent the Calibration-Step Generator output waveform. Where of connector to another, unterminated adaptors should be used. While o series coupling capacitor may be used ence

will

charge indefinitely, so voltage sag across

in

show is already quite Iorge of the reed switch ot 750 cycles per second. External charging voltage connected through o 5000-ohm resistor a short lead will

permit better operation with the coupling capacitor.

The

insertion unit capacitor and the short-circuit or shunt resistance connected beyond the series capacitor.

Obta

ining Information from Small Deflections

The vertical deflection foetor of the Type scope quently, very small deflections may be important. Careful analysis and proper techniques will

allow these small signals. ore sufficiently sensitive that signals few

trace widths of deflection

One of the more obvious means of recovering information

from

small deflections involves the largement. Here, the oscilloscope display using a high quality system and the photograph larged to o convenient size. Measurements may then be

Fig.

3-11

eun

con b tr

oce-•plitt

519

these ore used, they

to

allow the step generator to function, experi-

show that the capacitor cannot retain

the observations. Further, the coupling capacitor

to

is

approximately

you

to

. A lyplcal

d to o

ing technlque.

will

the correct voltage and

the center conductor of

must

obtain a great deal of information

crou-feed monipulalo

bta

ininfo

prevent the charge

from

it

is

necessary

to

be charged between operations

producing

to

match one type

(125

n connectors)

its

terminals

on

appear

on

the reed-switch side of the

10

volts per centimeter. Conse-

in

the oscilloscope display

The

triggering circuits of the Type 519

wh

ich

will

rrnotion f rorn Jrna

produce only o

provide o stable display.

use

of photographic en-

is

photographed

r an d micro•cope which

lldeflectionJ

will

its

insertion unit

519

is

then en-

thereby

initial

must

Oscillo-

from

by t

3-6

line

mode

from

the enlarged photograph.

lines

on

groticule

an

determine the exact enlargement factors so that distances on

the enlarged photograph con be readily converted into measurements of voltage and with this method prints.

A second method

wil

l

mediately vice such as o cross-feed manipulator, A Polaroid ® photograph of the cross-feed manipulator under o microscope contain-

by

ing

of

the trace the cross hairs. The

be

measurement on

the calibrated dials the appropriate deflection foetor gives the actual time or voltage between the two points.

In through the exact center of the oscilloscope trace. This splits the trace into two halves nique of measurement involving this imaginary line times referred mode with respect line passing through the center of the trace. Measurements mode with respect accurate than those obtained from, trace.

How well the position of the trace-splitting line con be determined which the trace focused the easier ter of the trace the best possib sary to actually draw cases this would only necessary microscope exact center of the trace.

the enlarged photograph con be used to

time.

is

the delay involved

for

from

small deflection involves the

cross hairs.

The

table

at

one point of measurement

The

manipulator

calibrated dials ore then set

is

then adjusted

lies

under the cross hairs and o second reading

The

obtaining information almost

is

token and mounted is

then adjusted

until

is

mode.

This

both methods described, o line

and

consequently the tech-

to

os "t race splitting".

to

the center of the trace and thus to the

to

the trace-splitting

will

depend to o Iorge extent on the care with

the measurements ore mode and upon how sh

is

focused.

Obviously,

it

is

located. Care should be token to obtain

le

trace and camera locus. be

for

you

(or

from

the better the trace is

is

to determine exactly where the cen-

in

the trace-splitting line.

very difficult,

if

to

make all measurements under the

on enlarged photograph)

Substitution Method of Frequency Measurement

Occasionally you may want to measure the overage repetition frequency of a random input signal.

doing this involves the use of the

Type 519, or some external signal generator with calibrated

In

frequencies.

used to trigger the oscilloscope. L

AYED +GATE tor. the capacitor charges

tion rate of the signal CM Rote the frequency con

he

across the capacitor.

this application, the random signal connector

The

circuit

is

shown

switch.

If

then the oscilloscope

Generator output or

be

Rote

The

is

then used to charge o capaci-

in Fig. 3-12.

will

depend

on

and

on

the setting of the NANOSEC/

from

the external signal generator,

adjusted

to

give the some voltage

The

distance between

primary difficulty

in

obtaining enlarged

use

of a de-

as

shown

in

Fig.

3-11.

on

the table

until

the center

lies

directly under

to

int

zero.

the second po

distance multiplied by

is

imagined

to

line

is

measurements ore

line

ore

much

y,

one side of the

some-

more

All

so

arp

It

is

not neces-

In

not impossible. It

most

from

One

means of

Generator

in

is

from

voltage to which

triggered

from

first

the

output

The

the overage repeti-

is

im-

of

run

ly

is

the

DE-

the

Fig,

3-12

,

Circu!t

a

random

t

lgnol

techniq11e

con

oignals

with

fr

oocilloscop e screen.

1,n

u5ing

al

so be u

equen<i e t

ed

to

the se too

•

IOk

.-W'.~oO--

DR-742

(

or06-100l

c

.SJif

measure

the

t

ub

tl

itution m

d to

measur

e

low to be

overage

the

mea u

el

l>od

fr

or

ed

From

+GATESO fl

repetition

.

Th

e

qu

ency

directly

DRAYEO

,_

e circuit

of

The

average

this

Use Fields

However, shielding provides only attenuation plete exclusion of extraneous fields. Therefore, ence of very large fields such

rat

e

of

and

pe riodic

from

the

repetit ion rote of the corona discharge

example

was

of the

Instrument

The

Type 519

measured

Oscilloscope

Applications-Type

and

found to be 2300

in

Rapid-Changing

is

a

well

as

those set

519

pps .

High

shielded instrument.

and

not

com-

in

the

pres-

up

by large

in

When the same the Rate Generator or as the repetition rate can ternal signal sure the overage repetition rate of the random the highest repetition rate of the Rate Generator mately comparison. scope value of the capacitor used chosen to give a substantial ably

The as a compromise between two factors. Since the width of

the

depends on the setting of the switch must capacitor. The maximum charge gate ure SEC/CM sweep repetition rote. tion rote fo

r the fastest sweep. A typical value for the capacitance

is

O.S the meter drops below 1 This of 3 cps to

An

sho

wn rate signal charge between a metal plate metal

discharge rod

ular

the

125-ohm coaxial cable.

voltage

is

obtained, the repetition rate of

average

30

is

accurate comparisons can be mode.

settings of the

gate

and

fa

irly high frequen cy signals

p.f

.

method should permit you to cover the complete range

example of the use of the substitution method is

in

plate

to,

SIGNAL

external signal

repetition

be

read from the Rate Generator or

generator

voltage

across the capacitor

kc)

if

the Rate Generator

Core

must

triggered once for each random input

NANOSEC/CM

obtained

from

be

set to produce a substantial charge on the

thus the slowest sweep . However,

switch should

The

is

obtained when the

The resistance

400

kc.

Fig.

3-13.

In

this application a random

is

being generated by a

is

connected to a

is

mounted

the metal plate.

125

n

connector of the Type 519 through o

generator

ro

te of the random

controls.

A

VTVM

is

in

both cases. The

signal

cannot exceed

is

used for the frequency

be token to insure that the

in

the application must be

vol

t

age

reading so that

control

the

be

set to

maximum possible sweep

is

10

volt,

41f

2

The

must

DELAYED

+GA

NANOSEC/CM

is

obtained with the widest

in

order

(up

to

400

kc)

allow

the highest possible

NANOSEC/CM

k.

If

the

voltage

short out the

high-voltage

and

a discharge rod. The +20-kv voltage inches

from,

and

corona signal

is signal.

used to

signal.

TE

connector

switch, the

the

switch

reading on

10-k

repetition-

corona

source.

perpendic-

is

applied to

the same

(approxi-

oscillo-

reason-

be made

to

meas-

NANO-

repeti-

is

resistor.

The

ex-

Fig.3-13.Usingth

mea-

og

surge generators, erratic trigger gering circuits ternal fields.

The

of a strong external field can adversely affect the operation of the instrument unless

oscilloscope forms resu!t ther shield either the instrument or the generator, or to move the source of the stray field.

Use

rents

set

either from the power line or signal stray triggering or enter into the oscilloscope display. Stray signals

coaxial cables or poor grounding.

braided

pedances

not to connections into the signa

dis-

Large transient ground currents con frequently be

uated by passing either the power cord or signal coaxial

The

cables through a ferrite torroid. The impedance to ground current

lead posses through the core. affected by the core. Ferrites should be placed as near as

possible to the connections to equipment under test.

&s

ub

stil

ut

ion

rn

e

&r&

p&litlonrol&ofocoronodi"horg

operate

It

is

Extremely Iorge fields may produce false signals on the

screen.

from

in

strument to a point farther away

of

Ferrite Cores

In

many applications for the Type 519, are

present. These ground currents enter the Type 519

generally enter the signal circuit through leaky

cable-

because

and

no

incl

ude

transient voltage drops

is

related to the square of the number of times the

thodford

e s

ing

from

energy obtained

important to recogni ze that the presence

adequate

precautions

If

difficulties

external

in

fields,

it

Solid

it

has lower outer conductor

electrostatic leakage.

l-

input circuit.

The

e

terrnininglh&oY&r-

ignol.

may result

ore

triggeri

ng

or false

will

be necessary to

la

rge

cables,

and

cable

Care

must

in

induct

power or signal

as t he

from

token.

from

ground

may cause

is

better than

be

ive

the

wave-

taken

ground

otten-

is

3-7

t

rigex-

fur-

the

cur-

im-

not

NOTES

Type

519

SECTION

CIRCUIT

DESCRIPTION

4

BLOCK DIAGRAM

A simplified block diagram of the Type 519 Oscilloscope

is

shown

in

Fig.

4-1.

This

general understanding of the operation of the instrument

after which the schematic diagrams ual con be used for more detailed information. The information which follows describes briefly the function

pose of each of the blocks shown

is

followed by a detailed circuit description

ment.

diagram con be used to gain a

at

the rear

of

the man-

in

and

the block diagram. This

of

the instru-

Fig.

4-1.

Typ•

519 OKIIIoscop• olmp lifit-d block

pur-

Input signals to the Type 519

1

25

n connector on the front panel of the instrument. The

signal

is

then applied through a trigger takeoff

nsec delay line to the terminated 125-ohm vert ical deflection system of the sweep

to be started before the vertical signal arrives

CRT.

The trigger takeoff obtains o sample

is

A

signal.

TRIGGER

then

SOURCE

diagrom

signal which triggering

the triggering signal used to initiate

are

applied to the SIGNAl

CRT.

The delay permits the horizontal

app

lied to the Trigger Channel os a

switch

in

the Trigger Channel selects

or

synchronize the hori-

.

and a 45-

of

the input

at

4-1

the

Circuit Descripti

zontcl sweep. Possible triggering signal sources ore the tical signal, external trigger inputs, the the Colibrotion-Step Generator. ore amplified, or attenuated, ger Channel end then applied Circuit. When very high frequency signals ore used , o special countdown circuit signal frequency appli down circuit operates

is Regenerator duces shape regardless of the shape or amp signal. A holdoff circuit prevents the blocking oscillator from hove hod o chance Cllit stfllment. Becol/se of the holdoff circllit, the moximllm rep: etition rote of the blocking 2 nanoseconds per centimeter, blocking oscillator qllencies up

operates a delay circuit generator Since the sweep con onds with respect to the trigger signal, this llltimotely permits the oscilloscope trace. erator Unblonking and

Blocking the cathode of the tion of the horizontal sweep. prodl/ced Bose Generator where dllrotion of the gate NANOSEC/CM control.

tially of a clomp tube, timing resistors, the copocitonce the plate circuit of the clomp tllbe, end o bootstrap circuit. When the clomp tllbe Bose tllbe charges, prodllcing the sweep sawtooth . A special bootstrap circuit tive end of the timing resistor, thereby prodllcing o linear sawtooth tance relatively constant.

feedback loop which operates lllbe. Reglllotion of the clomp tube plate voltage resl/lts o constant starting voltage fo adjusts the screen voltage to maintain the control grid of the clomp tube NANOSEC/CM switch. point

to o poraphose amplifier end t flection plates of the

on-

Type S 19

Rote

Generator, end

The

selected trigger signals

to

the required level

to

in

the Trigger Channel reduces the

ed

to the trigger circuits.

from

The

triggering signal obtained

used to initiate or synchronize the operation of the

on

output waveform with constant amplitude and

being triggered again before

also permits single sweeps

The

olltplll

Blocking

the vertical signal to

Blocking

When triggered

Oscillator, the Unblcnking Circuit applies o

by

he

Time-Bose Generator

T

Gate

by

The plate voltage of the clomp tube

rm.

In

addition, o separate regulator circuit outomoticolly

for

the clomp tube.

The sawtooth waveform

input frequenc ies to 2

from

Blocking

Oscillator.

The

to

reset after o sweep.

to

oscillator (and the sweep),

is

approximately

is

capable of counting down

to

approximately

SO

from

Oscillator

Time

the gote timer circllit

Generator, the plate capacitance of the clomp

maintaining the charging cllrrent for the capaci-

at

me.

the

First

Regenerator

which

then operates the Second

Oscillator after o variable delay time.

thlls

be delayed through 35 nanosec-

be

positioned horizontally within

The

outpllt

is

amplified and applied

-Bose

Gate

circllits.

by

the

Olltpllt

of the Second Regenerator

CRT

to unblonk the beam

The

it

is

l/sed

to

is

dependent

in

the Type 519 consists essen-

is

gated off by the olltput of the

is

l/Sed

to apply t

on

for

the sweep sawtooth wove-

- 3.2 volts regardless of the setting of the This

maintains the correct operating

which

hen

CRT

to

produce the horizontal sweep.

in

the Trigger end Holdoff

The

kmc

the Trigger Channel

blocking oscillator pro-

li

tude of the triggering

it

and

the sweep circllits

The

holdoff

be

generated by the

400

Blocking

from

the Second Regen-

for

time-bose

gate

is

applied to the

gate on the sweep.

on

the setting of the

he

sawtooth

to

is

regllloted

the grid of the clomp

is

generated

is

to

the horizontal de-

the

Trig-

count-

.

First

kc.

from

Oscillator

to

gate

the

dllrO-

which

Time-

the posi-

by

applied

ver

The fre-

The

4-2

-

The

high accelerating potentials required

CRT are

supplied

by

of the

Power Supply. Other operating potentials used by the Type 519 ore obtained

Two

signal generators Calibration-Step Generator produces output steps which ore continuously variable

brated.

The

repetition rote of the output steps

mately 750 steps per second and the risetime

0.1

nanosecond.

mately put pulses which ore etition rote. Repetition rote

kc.

The

risetime of the

30

nominally

0.5

nanosecond.

cir-

in-

at

Re-

the

to

is

in

o

in

VERTICAL

Trigger Takeoff

Input signals applied passed through o trigger takeoff before being applied the input of the 45-ncnosecond delay line. the trigger takeoff which con then be applied circuits.

A drawing of the trigger takeoff gop

is

mode

in cable while the inner conductor two metal rings ot the coaxial cable ore connected eight short jumpers. jumper

is

connected through o small

is

connected through each of the eight cores

put lead

series. T

he

eight cores and leads

formers.

The

output load sequently, due to the series arrangement, the impedance reflected bock into the primaries of each of the smell formers

is

approximately

this

primary impedance. T

nected

in

porollel across the

the coaxial cable actually present o total impedance of ap-

1.5

proximately

The

nanoseconds. than

I%

reflection. Over 99% of the input signal

mitted through the trigger takeoff into the 45-nonosecond

line

.

delay

The

voltage developed ac ross the cable due to the trigger takeoff the input voltage. T

1:1

transformers connected across the

eight

is

itive.

Since the

At

The

low

connected

net result

is

8 times

gop

frequencies the inductance

takeoff loop formers, the voltages of each of the transformers ore add ger takeoff

input signal voltage.

the expense ·of approximately 0.7% attenuation of the

signal applied to the oscilloscope.

thing preventing the

amount of inductance in the outer conductor inside the

the regulated High-Voltage

from

the Low-Voltage Power Supplies.

ore

contained

in

amplitude

and

The

Rote

Generator produces out-

fixed

in

amplitude but variable

is

variable between 3 cps and

Rote

Generator waveform

SIGNAL

CHANNEL

at

the SIGNAL 1

is

to obtain o sample of the input signal

to

the oscilloscope triggering

is

the outer conductor of the

on

the trigger takeoff

ohms with o decoy time constant

slight series impedance results

his

This

is

short-circuited gop

shown

is

not

gop

in

the outer conductor of the

ferrite core.

form

16

ohms.

Core impedances reduce

he

eight small transformers con-

gop

in

the outer conductor of

is

approximately 1.3% of

voltage appears across each of the

in

series through all eight Irons-

is

that the total output of the trig-

1.3

% or approximately 10% of the

triggering signal

by

from

being shorted out

for

operation

in

the Type 519.

accurately cali-

is

approxi-

is

approxi-

in

25

n connector ore

The

purpose of

in

Fig.

4-2

125

n coaxial

dis

turbed. Between

An

eight small

1:1

is

125

ohms. Con-

of

in

is

gop

in the coaxial

gop

. Since the

is

obtained

the cover, the only

is

o smell

in

the outer con-

Each

Irons-

trans-

The

rep-

. A

out-

is

to

in

30

less

at

10

% OF

VO

LTAGE

Fig.

4-2.

Construction

de

tail

s

of

the

trigger

tok

ea

ff.

The

jumpe

r

wir

es

ond

sm

all

core

s

or

e ohown

for

ductor would be insufficient to prevent the shorted out

and

consequently

no veloped across the gap. could be obtained fro m the trigger low-frequency response of the takeoff, Iorge ore placed around the side the cover. outer conductor operate fect the input

Delay

Signals through the 45-nonosecond delay line to flection low-loss deterioration of input signal woveshope. core the sweep signal

cable to allow

which

Cathode

A distributed deflection system Type 519. o Iorge is

applied only to this upper deflection system. deflection only to

The distributed deflection system velocity of propagation of the signal toward the screen the some flection system.

The

and

at

much

lower frequencies. These cores

signal.

Line

transmitted through the trigger

system of the

coaxial line which

is

token in the design of the sweep circuit to insure thot

is

started

as

is

applied.

This

display of the

produces the trigger.

-Ray

Tube

The

upper vertical

number of very

plate

is

internally bypassed

appl

y the vertical position

as

the velocity of the beam electrons

The

overaJI effects of the

voltage would

The

net result

cable

on bo

th

cores increase the inductance of the

thus permits the trigger takeoff to

CRT.

The delay line

is

especially

soon as possible after o triggering

permits o minimum length of delay

leading

is

used

deflection

small deflection plates.

in

g voltage.

is

center

simplicity.

gap

from

be

is

that

no

takeoff.

To

extend the

ferrite cores

sides of the

gop

do

not

takeoff

ore

app

th

e vertical

is

a high-quality,

selected for

minimum

In

addition, special

edge

of the signal

in

the

CRT

plote

is,

in

The

to ground

and

is

so designed that the

in

the

Iorge

number of

SIGNAl

TO

TRIGGER

portion

is n

pond

ed

to

ohow

detoil

o

of

being

effective vertical deflection plates

de-

flections ore additive.

output

CRT

is

kept relatively high while transit time effects

capacitance

Since

in-

af-

li

ed

de-

the ohm vertical deflection system, flection

system ohms. Any deviation from flections from the deflection system tortion of the flection system tuned by This

is

done before the deflection system envelope of the final processing of the

After the signal has passed through the deflection system

of the

CRT to the side of the through the def lection system reflected bock into the deflection system.

By

in

the plates ore minimized.

deflection

system of the

also

present a constant impedance of

displayed

waveform.

in

each

CRT

meam

of 27 trimmers for least reflected energy.

CRT

and

CRT.

it

is

terminated by o 125-ohm resistor connected

CRT.

Thus

TRIGGER

Trigger Source Switch

Triggering signals obtained from the

bration-Step Generator,

of the

nector,

effect,

TRIGGER

signal

determines which triggering

lower

Channel.

used

When triggering signals obtained signal, the bration-Step

is

de-

ore terminated when the

and

SOURCE

Rote

EXTERNAL

from the vertical input signal

switch. The

EXTERNAL

TRI

GGER

Generator ore not used, the triggering signals

by

120

ohms. A termination

Generator triggers

Circuit

Description-Type

the

wiring

.

Only

four

of

the

is

that their individual

th

is means the sensitivity of the

CRT

is

port of the

it

is

important that the

this

impedance would cause

and

would result

To

insure that the

is

exactly 1

25

ohms,

each

is

sealed

is

again quality-checked after

the signal energy traveling

is

obsored rather than being

into the

CHANNEL

Rote

Generator,

TRIGGER

125

0 con-

are

applied to the

TRIGGER

signal

SOURCE

is

applied into the Trigger

from

the vertical input

1

25

0

connector or the

is

not necessary

ore

not used.

in

Cali-

switch

Cali-

4-3

519

eight

and

125-

de-

de125

redisde-

is

Circuit

Des

cription--Type 519

Since the Calibration-Step Generator

ducing very Iorge steps,

lead running to the

trigger signal The

atlenuotor, composed of gering signal ceeding about 2 volts. Larger signals could conceivably cause tions other than

triggering unused sections of the

ing signal, the triggering signal

the - positions the negative or lolling slope Positive-slope triggers blocking when a negative slope verted to convert the negative slope to o positive slope.

125-ohm transmission and line the either of the two transmission line position of the gering signal the transmission without inversion. However, when the signal to the grounded conductor, the signal applied to the switch to the grounded transmission to-end induct shorted out. through a l inverting network.

app

lied into the Trigger Channel from ex-

damage

in

the Trigger Channel

X.2.

Resistors

RB,

R9,

and

R15

signal leads to damp unwonted resonances

In

addition to

+ positions the positive or rising slope

Inversion of the triggering

GAIN switches . is GAIN switch. Triggering signals may be applied to

ead

and

TRIGGER

its

primary function of selecting the trigger-

TRIGGER

ope

which produces triggering.

sl

are

in

the Trigger Channel. Consequently,

oscillators

grounded, while the other conductor

is

inverted. When the triggering signal

is

line between the

One

TRIGGER

is

connected to the ungrounded conductor of

line, the signal

ance

of the line prevents

The

transmission line

small ferrite core to increase the inductance of the

thus extend the low frequency performance of the

is

capable

an

ottenuotor

TRIGGER

R6

and

ore

added

SOURCE

switch also selects the

required to actually trigger the

selected, the signal

signal

is

conductor of the transmission

leads depending on the

SOURCE

switch. When the trig-

is

passed through the line

line conductor, the small end-

is

placed

SOURCE

R7,

prevents the trig-

in

GAIN switch posi-

in

series with the

swi

tch.

is

selected, while

is

must

accomplished

TRIGGER

is

connected to

is

ac

signals from being

is

possed four times

of pro-

in

switch.

In

selected.

be in-

in

SOURCE

connected

GAIN

connected

Gain Switch

Since triggering signals selected by the switch may have o Iorge range of must be provided for satisfy the requirements of the triggering circuits. and

ottenuolors switched

this funct ion.

Four positions

at

fier and areas

follows:

GAIN

Switch

Setting

X.2

NORMAL

xs

X20

The

various posi tions of the GAIN switch allow triggering signals arriving volts of amplitude to trigger the oscilloscope.

altering these signal amplitudes to

are

provided

tenualor connections for each of these positions

XS

Attenuotor Signal Unchanged X4

Attenuator

X20

Amplifier

at

the switch with between 20

TRIGGER

amp

litudes, some means

and

X20

Amplifiers

Amplifier

mv

in

by the GAIN switch perform

in

the GAIN switch. Ampli-

SOURCE

and

4-4

X20 Amplifiers

the

Two

identical wideband trigger amplifiers to permit stable triggering from small input signals. amplifiers

ore

arranged

on plug-in boards

Each

changeable.

on upper 3-db point beyond

frequency input impedance of each amplifier matching the trigger system transmission

The

in

quency-sensitive networks to maintain good transient re-

sponse, bandwid t

stability

The

the

at

in

L30, signal 034 while for slower input signals which ore not easily passed by C32

. Feedback through

mination of slower trigger signals.

the

Signals applied

at

the collector 044, the amplifier stage causes a phose reversal but since two stages ore used, the output signal has the some polarity as the input signal.

DC degeneration R43 emitter circuit of

C43

by for the high-frequency

044. R32 of gain at

the collector of

A de potential of amplifier. the pulse-ampl itude-selecting diodes, precede the Second word biased to permit trigger signals to be applied to the second amplifier.

A voltage divider consisting of the ore

044.

offers approximately 20 t

100 megacycles.

amplifiers employ feedback, degeneration,

h,

and

input impedance of 125 ohms

various frequencies by frequency-sensitive networks

R30, R32,

is

applied through

where they

operating voltages ore stabilized by emitter-circuit

produces o slight amount of degeneration

and

in

the transistors.

This

collector voltage for chosen to provide the correct voltage for the bose of

input impedance. Excellent gain

de-voltage stability results.

and

C32.

At the highest frequencies, the

C32

L30

and

is

coupled through C46.

in

both

044

the reduced degeneration helps to compensate

C32

034.

voltage

directly to the bose of

R30

supply additional termination

R45

also contributes to the ter-

ol the bose of

are

. At high frequencies,

also lend to compensate for this loss

-0.4

X20

034

ore direct

ly

coupled to the base o f

further amplified. The output of

034

and

044.

loss

in

gain

in

L37

adds

high-frequency peaking

volt

appears

is

necessary for proper action of

Amplifier. Diode

R47, R37,

034

. The values for the resistors

Function Switch

Signals from the output of the GAIN switch

First

X20

Amplifier

are

optional ohm transmission line to the FUNCTION switch. PULSE

and

SYNC triggering signals ore applied to the Second through the selection of trigger level by through required to send a signal through diode ond

10

tude-selecting diode pass very

positions of the FUNCTION switch the

pulse-OmR

R64

and

R63,

X20

Amplifier.

small triggers.

applied through a

iitude-selecling diodes. Front panel

R66A

thereby selecting the trigger height

In

the

SYNC

069

is

forward biased by

In

the

HF

SYNC

are

arranged

and

are

inter-

imes

gain with The

high

is

125 ohms,

line impedance.

and

is

closely maintained

appear

amplified

Each

amplifier

At

low frequencies

in

R43

is

bypassed

transistors

034

at

the input of each

068

and

069, which

069

must be

and

R36

supplies

and

125-

In

X20

Amplifier

changes the current

069 into the Sec-

position, pulse-ampli-

R63

position, trigger-

The

fre-

the

and

for-

the

to

ing

signals

or

e connected

directly

to

the

Osc

illa

to

r.

T

he

output

of

the

ap

plied through

t

he

Co

untdown

mately

30

me

The countdown operation assures th o! the output of the

Sec

R63 and tion the

068 ducts, shun ground. However, if the positive trigger

enough, t

-0

the positive

Amplifier.

the

069 signal tude.

pe tudes.

R66A

positive potential a Amplifier w

FU Th with the circuit most

Countdown

the FUNCTION to tion caus mately nized by tr mately VERN Countdown nization to

Oscillator. in volt bination AMPliTUDE SYNC control, app oscillator tion by the incoming trigger

operat app

but

ond

X20

Amplifier

In

the

PULSE

,

R64

,

and

R66A

- 26.5

volts.

of

068

and

bios

applied

and

069

is

ti

ng

it

will

wo

diodes which

.2 volt

wi

ll

por

By va rying the setting of

signal amplitude

to conduct. The circuit con

amp

litu

de

Thi

s

am

plitude-level-selection

rmit

stable

triggering from a wide ra

When

maximum triggering sensitivity

is

set to t

ll

ow

ing oil

positive trigger

it

hout significant

In

addit

ion to the

NCTION

switch

ese

other

o

pe

Oscillator

Th

e Countdown t

ri

gge

r

chan

switch.

the

cathode

of

es

the

Countdown Osci

30

me

. The Countdo

igge

2 kmc.

I

ER

SYNC controls

Oscilla t

be

obtain

Fig.

4

-3

shows a

T

he

para

ll

el. Approximately

ag

e

divider, consisting of

of

R54 OR

R67,

li

ed

to

the

tunnel

to

be

I

nd

uctor

L53

i

on

of

the

li

ed

to

the

ci

Countdown

069

to t

he

Second

Osci

ll

at

or

is

used, it free-runs

is

synchronized by the trigger signal.

does

not exceed

position

of

the

FUNCTION switch,

form o

voltage d ivider

Th

e divider sets

069

. Varying the selling

to

the t

wo

diodes.

negative with respect to ground

any

small

in

coming

cut

ofl 068.

A

signal

is

more positive th

cause

069

to conduct,

ti

on of

the signal

R66A

required to

while

rejecting

a

he

grounded

end

at

the

ju

nction of

signals

amp

litude

opera

tions

al

so

performs seve ra l ot

rations

will

be

nearly r

elated

Oscillator (050)

nel only

in

the

HF

Voltage

is

app

the

tunnel

diode,

ll

ator

wn

r

Th

5.5-ohm

and SYNC

varied

ploys

tunnel

rcuit,

Os

signals

with frequencies

e

P

ULSE

AM

PLITUDE

vary

the

or

slightly

to permit steady

ed

.

simplified

diagra

lo

ad

is

produced by

0.2

volt

R5

6

R55

,

from

control,

R66A

also

exert s

ome

diode,

allowing

as

required fa r stable synchroniza-

signal.

on

extremely

diode

oscillator.

the

voltage

Countdown

Osc

illator

X20

Ampli

fi

e

r.

ot

30

me.

be

tween

the

voltage

at

the

of

R66A

When

the

junction of

068

signals

thr

ough

signal

at

the junction of the an

a

pp

roximately

ther

e

by

on

to

the

Second

it

is

possible

to determine

ca

u

se

068

to cutoff

be

set

to

pass a certain

ll

signals

with

less ampli-

feature

is

necessary to

nge

of

si

gnal

is

. T

al

described in conjunct

circuit

li

ed

DSO.

ci

ba

and

-26.5

in

across the

required,

his

places

a

068

and

069,

to pass to the X20

reduction. r

eady

described, the

her

ope

to

the operation.

is

conn

ected

SY

NC

pos

ition of the

through

R56

T

he

circuit

configura-

to

free run a t

approxi-

ll

at

or

con

be

synchro-

up

to

approxi-

OR

SY

NC

s

ic

frequency

synchro-

m of

the

Countdown

R54

and

is

ob

t

ained

the

parallel com-

vo

lt

s.

T

he

,

and

the

VERNIE

fluence

on the

the frequency of the

im

po

rt

ant

po

rt in the

As

power

tunnel

is then

When

approxi-

resistors

+225

changes

R68

is

Iorge

passing

amp

slightly

thereby

rations.

and

of

from a

PULSE

vo

lt

is

diode

®

j

unc-

con-

to

X20

and

li-

fig

.

4-3

.

Slmplil

i.-1 circuit

builds

up

un

til

di

ode

charac

te

diode

decrease,

ux

here

diode

starts

r

in

it

voltage would

the

to

co

and

all

the

the increase in diode to decrease. However, to

io

n

fl The current through l53 not taken by capacitance B w the

into

l53

and

the

CUll

INT

R55

R

age

f

ig.

4·

4. gram optta

ohowo

lin

Optratlng

g cycl

th

t

tl

volrOgt -<ur

nd

fir

st

Circuit

Description-Type

5.

H!

-0.2VOlT IV

All

lAW!

diagram

of

th

e

the

voltage posses

is

t

ic

curve,

shown

s n

eg

current through l53

ll

apse

charges th e circuit to t he current through

c

yclt

l

ca

lt

d.

in Fig.

ative resistance r

cause the current through the

as

the

and

opposes a change in cu rrent.

L53

of

the C

ountdo.-n

re

nt

CU<V

t l or tloe

Countdown

over

the

4-4.

eg

ion.

diode current st is

mai

nta

050

flows

voltage

is

aga

in

O

tc

lll<~tor

tu

nntl

dio dt

Oscillator

peak

This

An

ined

in

req

.

y

ui

to

at

Tht

with

.

of the

places

fu

as

stray point

red

4-5

519

rt

arts

dl<1

her

in

by

·

lh

t

Circuit Des

cription-Type

As

current through

diode decreoses until point

curve

is

reached. At this time, the voltage again forces the

diode into

its

in

voltage would then cause on increase

decreose current. Because current, the excess diode current discharges circuit capacitances to the voltage

and

the voltage and

current

aga goes over the gion.

At

this result of the foregoing operation of the output of l

The output signals

0.5 volt

in

amplitude.

Varying the vo l tor by means of R required for the transition from thereby changing the frequency of oscillation. the frequency of within the range where app

lied trigger frequency.

Trigger

signals to the Countdown Oscilla tor ore con-

nected from a 125-ohm t ransmission line through a high-

519

L53

decays, the voltage ac ross the

C on the diode characteristic

negative resistance region. Any further

L53

does not permit o rapid change

at

point D

current reoch point

in slowly build up unt il the voltage again

at

A into the negative resistance re-

peak

point the cycle of operation starts over.

tage

66A

oscillation, the oscillator can be brought

is

53

about

the cycle shown

from

the oscillator ore approximately

applied to the tunnel dio

and R67

selectively changes the time

0 to A

it

con be synchronized by the

in

the diagram. When

0,

the diode voltage

o continuous oscillation

in

Fig

de

and

from B to

By

changing

diode

. 4-4.

oscilla -

pass filter

and

RSl

consists of

down Oscillator output

Res

istors line to the Countdown Oscillator from the output transmission line.

in

In

operation, the input tri

the

voltages

gering signa

ahead

slightly quency of the Countdown Oscillator can be adjusted to

The

give stable synchronization.

Second

C,

The

input to the Second either the input triggering signals or fr Oscillator, switch. The selected signal First

Regenerator Blocking Oscillator. The operation of the

X20

Second

to the cathode of

CSl

and

LSO,

and

is

used to isolate the Count-

from

RSO

and

Countdown Oscillator. Inductor

appearing across the tunne l diode. The trig-

ls

can thus cause the tunnel diode to switch

of the time that

the trigger input circuits.

RSl

are

used to terminate the transmission

ggering

it

normally would. The fre-

X20 Amplifier

X20

Amplifier

depending on the setting of the FUNCTIO N

Amplifier

is

amplified

is

the some as the Fir

signals

om

and

050

. The

L52

isolates the

ore

added

is

obtained from

the Countdown

applied to the

st

X20

Amplifier.

fil

ter

to

AMPltRER

4-6

ROM

SKOND

X20

Fig. 4-S . Trigge r Clr<ult blo(k

diagram

TO

UNBLANKING

AND

TIME-BASE

GATE

CIRCUITS

.

TRIGGER

AND

HOLDOFF

CIRCUITS

First Regenerator Blocking Oscillator

Fig.

4-5 shows a block

off circuits. Trigger signals from the

X20

Amplifier ore applied through

tude

limiting circuit.

signals

ore

the

windings of

tion of 070

071

to

turn off. This prevents the Iorge

from passing through 071 into

to prevent

passed.

Only

positive signals ore effective

tion of

070. current from T70

and

R72

T70

then induces a This causes flow through the

still

a

greater

transistor

to

continues until

070

starts to

voltage

from

base

of

070

thereby reset. The cycle

and

C77 recharges.

In

order to collapse directly across backswing, voltage.

At

the completion Regenerator Blocking Oscillator ing

again

The

purpose

operating

of

the

circuits which follow. The maximum repetition

permitted by the Holdoff Circuit

is

nsec/cm

applied

with frequencies higher than 400

counts down.

The bias on the divider network the

output

of

the FUNCTION switch, t he setting

the bios

on

070,

R66B ing signal must is

set for minimum resistance, the

070

is

insufficient to keep the transistor turned off the circuit free runs Circuit.

In

the

junction

of free run. The mined

by

be

varied by

diagram

of the Trigger

output

C70

low

passed through diodes 070

T70.

large

and

071

to

go

Iorge amplitude negative signals from being

When

a positive triggering signal

R71

and

D71

to

ground

negative

070

to

conduct,

collector winding to

negative

voltage

conduct more heavily. The

070

saturates. The heavy conduction by

discharge

C77.

T70

is

decreased.

to

be

reduced,

to

prevent a large backswing in the output

of

the field one

of

the

diode

conducts, effectively shorting

of

each

lor a certain time interval

of

the

Holdoff Circuit

frequency of

070

approximately

base

of

between

of

the Holdoff Circuit.

070.

By

raising

determines how much amplitude the trigger-

have

in

order

at

a rote determined

SYNC position of the FUNCTION switch,

R155

and

R156

rate

lhat

lhe

the Holdoff Circuit. The length

R:66A

and

R67 through

to

amp

litude positive triggering

and

positive signals

more positive, thereby causing

T70.

Diode

in

initiating the opera-

which normally flows through

is

interrupted. Field collapse

voltage

ot

thereby

permitting current to

at

the

regenerative

As

C77 discharges,

This

causes

and

the blocking oscillator

of

operation

about

T70,

diode

transformer windings .

cycle of

operation,

is

prevented

by

is

does

not

at

a sw

400

kc.

If

triggering signals

070

is

controlled by a

ground

and

+225

In

the

or

lowering

to trigger 070.

voltage

is

grounded,

circuit free runs

R60

®

and

Hold-

of the Second

o trigger ampli-

071 to one of

cause

the junc-

amplitude

signals

070

cuts off

is

applied,

the

bose

of

070.

T70

. This induces

base

causing the

action

the

output

the

drive to

is

then completed

due

D72

is

placed On out

the

First

from

operatthe Holdoff Circuit. to insure

that

exceed

the limits

rate

eep

rate

of 2

kc,

the circuit

voltage

volts

and

PULSE

position

of

R66B

influences

the

bose

voltage

When

R66B

at

the

bose of

and

by

the Holdoff

allowing

070

is

again

deter-

of

holdoff can

and

R61,

respec-

Circuit

lively,

to

permit the circuit to

trigger signals.

Resistors

R155

when

the

HF

SYNC position used. The level selected gives correct triggering fied signals from

Two blocking oscillator

arate

windings of off Multivibrator the

other

output

be

and

R:156

determine the triggering level

of

the

Countdown Oscilla tor.

outputs

T70.

One

output

and

+ Trigger

operates

the

Sweep

+Trigger Cathode Follower

A positive output from the First Regenerator Blocking

Oscillator

is

applied

through

V143B. The

output through a length of 50-ohm connector on the front panel. The cathode

time the

follower

tube

is

in

signal from

is

approximately

conducting.

R:75

cable

Holdoff Multivibrator

A simplified

diagram

is

shown

in

and

V134

off

the

R:116,

insures that both tubes

is

The grid of

voltage

divider

ing of

R:71,

ground

potential by the grid-to-cathode portion of

V123B

which

is

more positive than the grid of V114, V134 conducts.

the

This causes the common

the

at

approximately

With

Vll4

+ 100 volts, thereby setting the

approxima

the

clamped

at volts, capacitors C126 mately 100 volts.

When

are

by

the

to

Q70

is

applied

volts The

amp

litude of this pulse

of

cutoff.

ing the

cathode voltage

in

voltage

causes

capacitors through Rl26 voltage

at mitting V134 once more. The length of time required for to discharge sufficiently to permit Vl34 termined C126,

and

The values of Rl26

NANOSEC/CM switch. T

of the V134 remains cut off setting

of from the AMPLITUDE

of the Holdoff Multivibrotor Circuit

Fig. 4-6.

In

the normal static state, V114

is

conducting. A common

do

is

V114

between

D71,

and

operates

cut off, the grid

tely + 100 volts. With the control grid

ground,

operates,

thorugh

As

Vll4

at

the

and

the

grid

to

again

by

the values of R:l24, Rl25, Rl26, Cl 23,

by the

the NANOSEC/CM switch. Voltages

VERN

IER:

OR:

SYNC control , R:66A,

not conduct simultaneously.

held

approximately

-26

.5

R72.

The grid of V135

as

a diode. Since the grid

cathode

ground

potential, holding V114

of

Vl23A

cathode

and

the

cathode

and

C123

o positive pulse

R75

to the control grid

is

sufficient to bring

conducts

its

plate

of V123A to

cathode

of Vl23A cuts off

Cl26

and

Cl23

Rl25.

As

the

of

Vl34

rises slowly, eventually per-

conduct, thereby cutting off

voltage

at

R:l24.

ond

Cl26

ore

is

therefore

SYNC control, R67,

Description-Type

synchronized by incoming

the

FUNCTION switch

are

obtained

is

applied

Cathode Follower while

Delay Circuit.

and

R145

the

cathode

to

the +TRIGGER

output

SO

4 volts

volts

and

of

Vll4

of Vl23A

ore

charged

voltage

also

to

capacitors discharge,

selected

he

length

also

are

lor

ampli-

from sep-

to

the

to

the grid of

is

applied

impedance

ohms during the

cathode

resistor,

negative

ground

consist-

is

clamped

of

and

V134 to

in

is

at

approximately

of V123A also

of

at

to

approx

of

approximately

of V11 Vll4

drops, caus-

drop.

The

Vl34

start discharging

Cl26

and

to

conduct

by

th

e setting

of

time

determined by

applied

and

the

applied

519

Hold-

50 n

of

is

by o

V134

cutoff.

V134

+ 100

drop

Vll4 Cl23

is

PUL

to

and

that

4-7

is

the

cut

at

be

at

i-

B

4.

out

the

de-

the

SE

the

Circuit

Description-Type

519

PULSE

AMPliTUDE

OR

SYNC

POTENTIOMmR

....

...

+100

-2

50

Fig.

junction of

R126

end

R125.

Both

the vo

lt

age

at this point remains cut off. by the PULSE slightly control the repetition rate of the Blocking Oscillator, chronization.

Tube pedance charge pa th for two capacitors to rapid ly charge to the Vl34 conducts. their to be prepared for the next pulse from (113 to speed the

As are ground potential when plate circuit o f on the fron t panel of the instrument. V134 has reset.

By

Holdolf Multivibro tor, the

AMPLITUDE

V123A

is

used

It

full

charge rapidly

acts

as

o bootstrap capacitor lor rise

of the pulse

previously mentioned, the grid

used as a diode which clamps the grid of Vl34

V123B

is

conducting to indicate that the holdolf period

elapsed

and

that the Ho!dolf Multivibrator has been

4-8

of these controls influence

and

thus the time that

modifying the holdo/1 time provided

OR

070,

is

important that the capacitors regain

VERNIER

SYNC

controls can be used to

in

the circu it to provide a low

C123

in

V134

is

used to light the

First

order to obtain stable syn-

and

C126.

full

order for the multivibrotor

070

V114

at

the pla te of

and

cathode of

is

conducting.

The

lamp lights when

R116

-250

4-6. Holdoff Cir

SYNC

Regenerator

This

allows the

100 volts when

. Capacitor and

is

V114.

V123B

ln

addition, the

READY

+100

cuit•implifi&d circuit

V134

and

im-

used

at

lamp

diogrom

.

Holdoff

Cathode

Follower

When the Holdoff Multivibrotor

070,

the rise

in

put of the grid of ing

positive

applied to the bose of

As

the cathode

and

C142 to the cathode voltage. resets, the grid voltage of Vl43A drops to

Because of capacitors

level. cathode of

fo

llower cuts discharge through the cathode resistors, gradually permitting the it

con again be triggered.

in

the cathode circuit of

time to the holdoff time provided by the action of

holdoff the

Ho

ldoff Multivibrotor. holdo/f time come reset

070

before

plate voltage of Holdoff Cathode Follower, rise

in

voltage at the cathode of

070

holding the transistor cut off.

voltage

of

ore charged rapidly through the cathode follower

V143A

off.

base

voltage of

is

and

is

V143A

later,

as the Holdoff Multivibrator

Cl42

is

unable to follow,

Capacitors Cl42

070

to approach the point where

The

V143A

The

to permit the Holdoff Multivibrator to be-

C123

permitted to

purpose of this additional

and

C126 to become

operate

HOLDOFF

VOLTAGE

..

"

..

R143

070

-26

.5

is

triggered by the out-

V134

is

applied to

V143A.

The result-

V143A

is

rises, capacitors

its

and

effect of the capacitors is

original

Cl43, however, the

and

the cathode

(143

then slowly

to

odd

on

addit

fully

charged

on the next cycle.

to

then

Cl43

ional

The

value

of C143

is

determ

in NANOSEC/CM pr.:wided selected by the setting of the provide the necessary charging time for

Singl

SINGLE

reconnected to voltage off positive voltage from generated.

SWEEP normally

26.5 connection through C168 voltage transistor into conduction. When creose volt duct more tive Tl60, creose. tor to start to turn off. the base of transistor

pressed, was discharged by the switching cycle unable to support another cycle elapsed for the capacitor to recharge. Transistor tinues to conduct The bock to lack of charge switching operation more than once each time the button

off Multivibrato and junct Diode level. level

and V114 negative. Diode except when D161 9

volts

from ing co uses the cathode voltage of

switch. The extension of the holdoff time

by the

Holdoff Cathode Follower

e

~Swe

e

p

Reset

When the NORMAL-SINGLE

SWEEP,

R124

-26.5

at

the grid of

and

V114

to

normally

at

being triggered, thereby preventing sweeps from being

In

th

e

SINGLE

SWEEP

switch also applies power to

not conducting,

volts.

The

bose of

discharges through

at

the

base

in

current through

age

at

the

base

heovily.

voltage

at

the base.

the output voltage

This

decrease

0160

reoches

If,

An

When

When the

cutoff, the cycle

alter

a switching cycle, the

0160

goes bock into conduction. However,

as

voltage drop across Rl64 prevents

-26.5

volts

on

is

pressed.

output pulse from

r.

R161

between ground

ion

of diodes

D161

clamps the amplitude of the pulse

D160

resets the circuit only

is

below ground.

V134

is

conducting, the common cathodes of

V134

are

at

apP.roximately ground potential. When

is

conducting the common cathode

D160

it

receives the reset pulses from shunts positive signals larger than approximately to ground.

RESET

T160

is

app

lied to the common cathode circuit caus-

V114

to cut off.

ed by the setting of the

is,

NANOSEC/CM

C123

and

SWEEP

switch

is

disconnected from

volts.

The

V134

causes

conduct. With

the cathode of

position, the

(164

0160

R163.

When the

R168

.

of

0160

goes negative, bringing the

T160

of

0160

causing the transistor to con-

This

then induces a

As

and

regeneration base drive

in

the base drive causes the

This

induces a positive voltage

which cuts off the transistor. When the

long

as

the

again

until

C164

prevents

Tl60

is

A

voltage

divider consisting of

and

D160

and

D161

is

thus held cut off

button

is

pressed, the positive output

The

rise

V123A

is

+

100

resulting

decreose

V134

to normally cut

V134

cut off, the

V143A

prevents

NORMAL

0160.

Since

and

C168

both charge to

is

held

at

ground by the

RESET

switch

As

C168

discharges, the

0160

conducts, the

induces a mare negative

still

greater

C164 discharges into the

is

completed.

RESET

button

is

and

is

until

sufficient time has

button

C164

from performing

-

12

.6

at

if

the cathode

plate

to go to

0160

is

depressed.

from

is

released. The

volts

bioses the

about

at

is

about 3

at T160.

voltage of

about

RESET

the switch

0160

applied to reset the Hold-

in

therefore,

switch to

(126.

placed at

volts

in

-S

INGLE

0160

is

closed,

nega-

transis-

still de-

C164

therefore

con-

charging

RESET

R160

-9

volts.

ground

vol

tage

V114

vo

all

times

Diode

V114

+

Circuit

+100

"'

+-

--~

NfGATIVE

PU

lSE

FI

and

070

the

is

in-

de-

at

its

lt

s

100

OM

T70

Fig.

4-7

.

Swup

volts.

Resistors tween - 26.5 volts V123A.

The voltage divider places a positive vo l the grids of This

in

turn ligh triggered on the next triggering signal. When triggered, the sweep T70

again causes

off

V134.

The Holdoff Multivibrator remains in

dition

until

the

multivibrator.

Sw

ee

p

Delay

A simplified diagram of the Sweep Delay

in

Fig.

4-7. A voltage divider between

-26.5

volts initially sets the voltage

and

D82.

The voltage varied by means of the varies from ground potential to several 070

goes through

pulse

at

the junction of off, thereby interrupting the voltage divider network. sudden drop tive voltage step by a negative ramp as the voltage

at diode conducts, producing o negative voltage of

0180.

When the voltage ficiently negative to blocking oscillator

The

time duration between the operation of

triggeri

ng

of charge on

C83. by the setting of the setting of

RBB,

'"

081

~

R

Un

-2

D•

lay

Circult oimplifi•

R124

and

R125

and

the

+

Vl34

in

0180

the starting point of the romp-shaped wave-

100 volts on the cathode of

and

V123B

ts

the

READY

lamp

runs

and

Vl14

to go back into conduction, cutting

RESET

button

is

Circuit

at

this

DELAY

its

blocking

DBO

and

current through

at

the cathode of

C83 charges through

the cathode of

at

allow

the transistor to conduct, a

cycle

is

started.

is

largely determined by the

The

charge on

DELAY

control,

Desc

ription-Typ

e

+ 100

R87

-'\Atv-~

08

2

~

=

C8

3

6.5

dclrcuit

diagram.

form a voltage divider be-

causing them to conduct.

the positive output

again pressed to reset the

point

control,

oscillator

D81

R82

D82

the

bose

C83,

tage

and

permits

070

this

Circuit

is

shown

+

100

volts

at

the junction of

in

the circuit can be

R88.

The

voltage

vol

ts

positive. When

cycle, a negat

causes

D81

to cut

produces a

small nega-

D82.

This

is

followed

R83.

of Q180

By

When

at

the goes

Q70

and

is

determined

changing the

becomes negative the

however,

R88.

to

in

...

from

base

4-9

519

con-

and 081

The

suf-

iti

on

be

is

ive

the

a l

Circuit

Description-

Type 519

form applied to the cathode of the delay

in

the operation of

The

small resistor,

of the romp-shaped waveform which overcomes the bios

082

on

and

allows

delay when

RB8

D82

0180

RB2,

provides a small step

01BO

to be triggered with minimum

is

at

the ground end.

can be changed.

con also be varied.

at

the start

Thus,

Second Regenerator Blocking Oscillator

Operation of

0180

is

and

will

therefore not be described

similar to the operation of

and

0160

The

purpose of the Second Regenerator Blocking Osci!lotor

is

to produce a constant output-amplitude pulse after a variable time-delay, each time that the oscilloscope The output of the Second Regenerator Tl80 to a distributed amplifier stage through

is

applied

RIBS.

070

in detail.

triggered.

from

Distributed Amplifier Stage

The

output of approximately

applied to the grid line of

is

obtained from the junction of

tubes

is

applied through

The

positive signal duces a negative signal is

applied through C190

Distributed Amplifier.

is

to develop the Iorge amount of power required to drive

the Time-Base

Ga amplifier circuit risetime of the output from the Second Regenerator ing Oscillator.

When the positive pulse ore current of approximately 0.5 ampere . The peak current, however, seconds out of each 2.5 microseconds or more, resulting

on amount of peak current develops approximately o

pulse across the 100-ohm load 220-ohm reverse termination

The is blonking circuits require a positive drive pulse. Transformer T198 former uses a through o ferrite core. Energy twin leads at core transformer. T previously which inverts triggering signals ot the SOURCE

The

40

o length of cooxiol cable, where Unblonking a certain period determined by the setting of the SEC/CM the pulse and

te

is

used to minimize the deterioration of the

brought into very heavy conduction,

is

only

demanded

overage

current of approximately 5

pulse developed

negative. However, the Time-Bose Generator

is

used to produce the voltage inversion.

twin

at

the input side

the out put side with the opposite polarity .

is

used to extend the low-frequency response of the

his

transformer

switch.

output from

volts. The pulse

T198

and

Time-Base

switch (and for only the three fastest sweeps)

is

reflected bock to the junction of

0199, but

in

+10

volts from V194.

Bios

R187

and

RiBS

V1B4

and

V194

The

distributed

is

applied, the tubes

with

a total peak

mo.

The

(R199)

V184

and

The

from

the other l

The

TRIGGER

D197

and

D198 into

is

transmitted into the

D197,

TlBO

for the

Block-

Iorge

40.volt

ond the

V194

trans-

ferrite

NANO-

019B,

V1B4

and

R1B5

to the grid line.

at

the grids of

at

the plates. The negative signal

and

C196 to the plate line of the

The

main purpose of the amplifier

and

Unblonking circuits.

from

T180

lor approximately 25 nano-

at

the output

(R190).

in

the plate line of

lead transmission line possed seven times

is

coupled into one of the

and

token

is

similar to the one described

is

o positive pulse of approximately

is

possed through

it

Gate

Generator circuits. After

the opposite polarity. The negative re-

4-10

fleeted pulse causes pulse to be terminated vents unwonted multiple reflections.

Clipping

As pulse from delay line into the clipping line . The clipping line to determine the length of the time-base and

10 posed of 3 sections of coaxial cable. the positive pulse travels down the clipping reaches the short provided by a switch contact. The shorted output causes a reversal. gole appearing at the grid of positive pulse appearing the time required for the pulse to travel to the end of the

is

clipping line, the grid of

and

of cable used. The NANOSEC/CM switch changes the

length of coaxial

pro-

thus determines the length of the

The means of the dipping line tors. The first limitation

than the duration of the positive pulse obtained from T

The

second limitation

additional lengths of cable for the clipping lines

length of the for long lengt

hs

In

all posi tions of the NANOSEC/CM control except

5,

and

in

prevents reflections. tions, the length of the time-bose

Gate

Un-

In the switch, plote voltage and

V283, thereby disabli these positions, the length of the by the clipping line length.

ead

NANOSEC/CM switch, plate voltage tubes. tender Circuit.

A voltage divider between sisting of maintaining the grid a few volts negative. With

R262

off,

100

+ Grid current keeps the grid tial. Capacitor 100

volts.

When o positive pulse the tube conducts, causing the plate volta

0199

to conduct allowing the reflected

and

absorbed by

UNBLANKING

AND

TIME-BASE GATE

Line

shown

in

the block diagram of

T198

is

applied through o lumped-constant

positions of the NANOSEC/CM switch

100% reflection of the pulse

The

reflected pulse then t

reflect from the shorted end,

V244.

maximum

gate

gates

would make

impractical.

10,

R250

Gate

Extender Multivibrotor determines the final

V244. The

at

the grid of

This

is

twice the transit time of the length

cable

used to produce the reflection

gate

length which con be produced by

is

limited by two primary foe-

is

that the

gale

is

imposed by the physical need for

is

increased. The long cables required

this

means of setting the

terminates the clipping line

In

all of these slower sweep-rote posi-

gate

.

Extender

2,

5,

and

10

positions of the NANOSEC/CM

is

disconnected ng

the

Gate

gate

In

ell other positions of the

Fig.

4-9

is

a simplified diagram of the

C262

R256,

and

V274

is

therefore charged to

is

-250

R250

holds

normally conducting heavily.

at

approximately g round poten -

appl

ied to the grid of

R257,

and

R263 set the plate voltage

volts. Tube

R199.

This

pre-

Fig

. 4-8, the positive

is

used

gate

in

the

2,

and

is

com-

In

these positions,

until

line

and

a polarity

urns

off the positive

duration o f the

V244

depends on

and

return to

connot last longer

as

gale

and

thereby

V264,

V393B,

determined solely

is

applied

to the

Gate Ex-

in cut off by

V264

at

approximately

app

roximately

V264,

ge

to drop. The

and

produced.

from Extender Circuit. is

volts ond ground con-

V264

5,

it

19B.

the

2,

In

cut

POSITIVE

~~~

--~~'---~~~--------------~~~----~~

TJ98

Fig.

4-8

.

Unb

l

anki

ng

ond

Time-

Bo

le

Gal

• Circuit blo<k

diogram.

drop

in

plate voltage causes

h

as

discharged through

ducts

and

ends the time-bose gate.

remains cut off

the value of

R270

At

lhe 1000

setting of the

tion of the

gate

During the time that

near

+

100

volts.

across

R280

and

The

purpose of the divider for the grid of V3938

is

then applied to the grids of both sections of

The resultant

rise

cathodes of

V283 by o similar amount. extends the pulse obtained required

lor

a

V274

to cut off. When

R271

an

d

is

controlled by the setting of

selected by the

is

approximately

The

R281

V393B.

of approximately

causes the grid of

particular

R270,

NANOSEC/CM

9

V274

is cut

off,

. positive r

ise

and

applied to the grid of

is

to obtain the correct de level

The output from cathode

The

voltage

from

T198

sweep duration. During the time

V274

again

The

time that

C262

NANOSEC/CM

swi

t

ch

the

microseconds.

its

plate

voltage

in

voltage

is

20

to

30

vo

lt

s

V244

to go positive

obtained from

for the time interv al

C262

that the pulse

from

con-

the cathodes of

V27

4

and

divided

follower

The

by

Amplifier,

switch.

Unblanking Amplifier,

dura-

regenerates the input signal after expiration of the drive pulse

is

shot multivibrotor

V393B.

V283.

Gate

at

the

V244

V283

high current necessary to drive the Both cathode voltage of both

T198

V283

resulting positive g

V244,

to

and

causes

th

e

Amplifier

is

o high GM pentode which is used to obtain the

the cathode

and

®

Circuit

----~

is

present, the positive

holds

V283

ate

is

applied

V264,

and

to the Delayed-Gale

V214.

The

Gate

Extender to operate as o

dynode

vol

tages are regulated. The

V214

and

Description-Type

voltage

in

cutoff.

to the Sweep-Gate

positive signal

Time

-

Bos

e Generator.

V244

is

set

at

V264

one-

approxi-

4-11

519

at

and

Circuit Description--Type

P05mYE

:~~

------~~---------------------'

TI91

mately

+7.5 voltage on the ca thodes holds both while permitting the grids to be near ground potential.

When a positive pulse

V244

conducts heovily causing the plate voltage to drop.

The

resulting negative pulse

Time-Base Generator where

519

volts by emitter fol!ower

is

applied to the control grid,

at

the plate

it

is

used

Fig.

V214

to

+225 +225

4-9. Gat

0238. The and

V244

is

applied to the

gate

on

e Extender Circ

positive

in cutoff

the sweeJ:

uit 1implif ied clr tul t d iagr

+100

ili~'---------

the durati

on

of the time-bose positive

V214.

The

positive pul

0214

and

0215 ing a + 12-volt pulse DELAY

ED +GATE

+225

~~----

am.

se

at

the base of

emitter-coupled switching network provid-

at

the front-panel connector labeled

50

!1.

gate

0214

--

R2SO

at

the grid of

saturates both

Delayed-Gate

With no positive gale applied to the grid of

is

biased beyond cutoff approximate to the grid of voltage drops. Diodes the plate voltage of set when the cathode voltage of +540 in

voltage. T plate voltage of

T C22B The

and

Unblanking

by

ly

at

approximately volts, t

he he

he

drop

in

and other components to the cathode of the

negative pulse

0238, and the plate voltage

+650

volts. When the positive

V214,

the tube conducts heavily and the plate

D214

and

D215

V214

con drop.

+540

diodes conduct, preventing o further decrease

limiting action of

V214

plate voltage of

at

The

volts by Zener diode D

D215

drops

D214

to

decrease

by

V214

the cathode unblanks the

4-12

Amplifier

V214,

gate

is

limits

the amount that

anode of

220. Thus,

to

approximately

and

D215

permits the

only about

110

is applied through

the tube

applied

D214

volts.

CRT.

CRT

is

for

TIME-BASE

GENERATOR

Block Diagram

A block diagram of the Time-Base Generator

Fig. 4-10.

Two

conditions

are

automatical!y maintained

order

for

the generator to

condition

is

that the plate voltage of

at + 155

volts to insure that the sweep

from

the some voltage

is

maintained

in

The

first

between sweeps properly. V331 sawtooth waveform starts

is

shown

function

for

in

eoch

@

SCREEN-

GRID

SUPPLY

(SLOW

LOOP

)

V393AV394

V403

Fig.

4-

10

.

Tim

sweep.

The

second condition

age

of

V331

is

Two

feedback

conditions.

The

first feedback

V331

deviates

from occurs, an error Regulator Circuit (fast through the Disconnect Diodes The

error

signal

to

bring the plate voltage

the

signal

at

the grid of

the grid

voltage second feedback circuit Grid

Supply

compares

reference.

If

the the Screen-Grid V331

in

such o manner as

the control

grid to

When a negative erator, both feedback V331

is

cut off.

in

the plate

circuit of

Cathode

Follower

flection

plates

of the

CRT

moves the electron beam

to

form

the sweep. A bootstrap cathode-follower circuit

used

to

improve

by driving the more-positive end of the timing resistors.

is

that the

maintained loops are used two

loops

are shown

loop

operates

+

155

volts between sweeps. When this

signal

is

loop)

causes

V331

re

main ot

(slow

the

control grid

Supply

adjusts the screen-grid

-3.2

volts.

gate

loops

The

sawtooth waveform

V331

and

the

CRT.

the

linearity of the basic sweep generator

control

at

approximately

to

provide these starting

on

the

block

if

the

plate voltage

generated

in

the

which

is

amplified

to

the control grid of

to change

its

back to

-3

grid

to

is

and applied through the Output

Parophase Amplifier to the The

operating point

+

155

volts.

disturbs the condition that

.2

volts

and thus causes the

loop)

to operate. T

voltage

of

V331

voltage

is

not

at

cause

the

fast

applied

to the

are temporarily disabled and

is

then generated

sawtooth waveform ot the

horizontally across the screen

grid

-3.2 diagram.

Plate-Voltage

and

However,

he

Screen-

against a

-3.2

voltage

loop

to move

Sweep Gen-

BOOTSTRAP

CATHODE FOlLOWER

VJSJ

e

-laH

Gene•alo•

volt-

Plate-Voltage Regulator

volts.

After each sweep

is

returned to

tendency for

of

result on

the screen.

fed

The

V331.

grids of output cathode voltage 250 volts by through voltage the cathode of age

volts,

voltage

of

cathode mal. plate current to decrease voltage rent through

T

he

is

set

de-

current through the transistors current across

is

of

V331 V331 to the proper

Circu

it

block

diagram.

is

produced,

volts

by

the fast regulator

voltage

to

shift between sweeps

of

V331

is

follower

V343

diodes 0344

ol

grids of

in

turn appl ied through

where

it

is

grid obtained

higher than

V374B

will

be

at

R373.

to the bose of

0328

to decrease.

Q32B

and

is

in

the positive d:rection.

heavily,

lower"ng the plate voltage

the plate voltage

normal,

Q31

+

155

this

in

a horizontal movement of

plate voltage

at

the

cathodes of

Zener

R344

to

the cont r

of

V363

is

V374B

on the

control

of

V331

is

voltage

of

Th

is

reduces conduction through

is

applied

Q31B

and

current through disconnect diodes by

transistors

th

rough the disconnect diodes. The

R380

is therefore reduced, allowi

to move

to conduct more

level.

Description--Type

loop.

the

start of the sweep

applied

directly to

V343.

The

level

is

reduced approximately

and

0345

and

V363.

The

R375

and compared with the from

R374

.

1f

the

for

example, the

more positive than

V374B,

causing the

Th

e

re

sulting

Q31B

causing the

V312

and

B.

Therefore, as the

reduced, so

also

vo

lta

ge

ng

the control grid

This

519

of

V331

Any

would

of

applied

cathode

L375

volt-

plate

nor-

rise

cu

V322

is the

drop

permits

4-13

the the

to

in r-

Circuit

Description-Type

A decrease

for

similarly. more negative and thereby allow the plate voltage to level.

519

in

the plate voltage of

The

grid voltage of

by

the feedbock loop

V331

Screen-Grid Supply

As

a result of action

he

control grid of

loop, t

-3.2

normal follows:

The

to

the grid of

age

at

the grid of more negative, voltage

at

the grid of

duction through

V394.

voltage of divider to the grid of screen-grid voltage of

When the screen-grid voltage of

on

through

ducti voltage

to

rise.

the control grid of

rent and return the plate voltage

by

the Plate-Voltage Regulator

V331 volts. voltage

V393A,

for

V394. This

may tend

This

is

corrected

at

the grid of

where

it

is

compared with the volt-

V394.

If t

he

grid voltage of

example, than normal, the negative

V393A

produces on increase

produces a drop

The

voltage drop

V403

causing a decrease

V331.

V331

The

V331

also decreases, causing the plate

Plate-Voltage Regulator loop makes

more positive to increase the cur-

APPROXIMATRY

VOLTAGE

EACH

SWEEP

FOR

COII:RECT

TIMING

V331

is

compensat

would be forced

to

decrease conduction

rise

to the proper

to

not be

by

the slow loop

V331

is

also applied

in

is

applied through a

is

decreased, con-

to

normal.

+475

V,

ADJUSTED

ON

RANGE

SWEEP

TIMINGRESISTOII:

SELECTED

NANOSEC/CM

at

V331

in

con-

the plate

in

Thus,

1336

BY

change

in

ed

the

as

is

the

SWITCH

screen-grid voltage produced Supply causes the Plate-Voltage Regulator loop to return the control grid to - 3.2 volts. the control-grid voltage of be adjusted by means of ulated control-grid voltage.

Capacitor

C333C Screen-Grid Supply Voltage Regulator loop.

is

Grid Supply Range switch is

to readjust screen voltage as the Sweep

is

replaced.

in

the cathode of

from

operating as last

The

operated and

The

reference voltage which

V331

is

compared against con

R396

to

obtain the correct reg-

main

function of the Screen-

as

V331

Sawtooth Generator

When a negative

Gate

circuits, the amplified gate

diodes

R380.

This

plitude.

gate

without affecting

cuts

off

thereby disabling the feedback loops.

cuts

also waveform. A simplified diagram of the Time-Base Gen-

is

erolor

gate

is

produced

D305,

0306, 0307 and

negative ga te

The

four Zener diodes decrease the

V312

and

off

V331

contained

+650

D308

is

approximately

its

amplitude.

V322

and drives

to initiate the generation of the sawtooth

in

Fig.

4-11.

+450

-250

is

applied through Zener

by

the Screen-Grid

V403

prevents the

as the

Plate-

eventually ages or

by

the

Time-Base

and developed across

45

volts

in

am-

de

level of the

The

negative gale

V393A

toward cutoff,

The

negative gale

4-14

TIME-BASE

GATE

LT

F

ig,

4-11, Tim

e-Bau Ge nerator simplilied circuit diagram ,

+-----+----

-250

T~~~T

Approximately

in

capacitance starts to charge toward approximately

volts through charges lected voltage obtained

which of stray capacitance

voltage obtained

by

the NAN05EC/CM switch.

justed

sweep timing

the Power Supply Diagram.)

T the stray capacitance Cathode Fol!ower, level of the sawtooth waveform volts the sawtooth applied to the grids of lower. of of the cathode of as the voltage timing resistor, the voltage across the timing resistor constant, the rent charging the stray capacitance Bootstrap Cathode Follower thus causes the copocitonce charge linearly rather than ner. linear output sawtooth waveform. waveform to

Tube in important as rapidly in cut off by the bios voltage obtained

381

R start the sweep, the signal passing through by

At is V3BB to discharge the capacitance in the cathode circuit of The current available the cathode voltage of

16

pi

the plate circuit of

by

the stray capacitance charges de termines the rote

rise

means of o separate potentiometer

to

he

sawtooth waveform produced

by

The

V353

V332,

The

the grids of

the cathode circuit of

time to be ready lor the next sweep. Normally

and

0384, charging

the end of the sweep gate, the positive rise

coupled to the grid of

to go into conduction to supply the current necessary

total capacitance

V331.

R336.

The

is

of the sawtooth waveform produced across the

is

V388

rate

determined

by

the NANOSEC/CM switch and

from

the +475-volt supply.

and

ultimately the sweep rate.

from

the +475 volt supply

provide the necessary

on

their respective sweep ranges [refer to

is

applied

V343.

diodes 0344

and

is

unchanged.

V353,

sawtooth waveform appearing

applied through

thereby cutting

V332

rises

at

the plate of

R336,

remains approximately constant. With

linear charging of the capacitance produces a is

applied

from

V424.

is

used

to

rapidly discharge the capacitance

in

order

to

return the grids of

as

possible

to

allow C356 and

R383

. When the negative

C380.

to

V343

to

ground appears

When the tube cuts off, the

at

which the stray copocitonce

the particular value of

The

At

the cathode of

0345

The

C356

V332

at

approximately the some rote

in

the normal exponential man-

the junction of 0345 and

V343

V388

discharge the capacitance causes

to loll rapidly, as

by

The

is

for

each range of

potentiometers ore ad-

vol

tage

to

obtain correct

by

the charging of

to

the gri

ds

of the Output

V343

is

decreased

by

while the amplitude of

sawtooth waveform

the Bootstrap Cathode

at

the cathodes

and

C357

to

the cathode

off. Since the

V331,

alter each sweep.

through

voltage

the voltage across the

is

also constant.

The

output sawtooth

V353

C357

to discharge

from

the junction of

gate

is

applied

C380

is

C380

. T

is

R336

the exact

adjustable

about

to normal

clamped

in his

required.

Paraphase Amplifier

The

output sawtooth waveform the Porophase Amplifier, is

obtained

from is tooths are used form as the sawtooth obtained

the cathode and a negative-going sawtooth

obtained

from

the plate. The

is

ISO

volts or more. Zener diodes 0430 and 0431

to

decrease the

obtained

from

is

V424.

A positive-going sawtooth

de

level of the sawtooth wove·

the plate

to

the same average voltage

from

the cathode.

applied to the grids of

amp

litude of both sow-

The

negative

Circu

going waveform of the

+475

the right hand deflection plate. Positioning voltages ore

applied to the deflection plates

tion resistors

se-

rote at

V388

voltage

The slowly. be blanked.

The

blanking circuitry would be required. Therefore to keep the blanking circuitry at circuit has a chance to blank the beam. resets. than

the

de

250

is

then

Fol-

High-Voltage Power Supply

at

The mately high-voltage transformer. stepped

cur-

age V812,

The

applied to the post-accelerating terminal of the

to

cathode of TSOl. mately

R344

A sample of the voltage obtained V832 grid of

This

is

preset level, a voltage change appears V814B V814A which

is

sate set

to

grid of

CRT

causes

V343.

is trol grid, and B853, ode, control grid, changes voltages of the

R856 where the cathode voltage age unblonking pulse blanking circuit. The ficient range of an unblanking pulse.

is

applied

CRT

while the positive going waveform

Porophase Amplifier

If

it

visible

on

In

the right side of the screen

Even

suff

icient time lor reset.

HIGH-VOLTAGE

High-Voltage Oscillator,

20

kc

up

at

rectifiers. A voltage tripler circuit made up of

and

V822 V832

The

rectified voltage at the plate of

-4.2

is

applied

V814B.

. The voltage change

and causes a change

adjusts the amplitude of the oscillations to compen-

for

the change

by

adjusting

V8148.

Circu

its

A voltage divider between the plate of used to obtain operating potentials lor the cathode, con-

8854,

in

The

control grid voltage for the

which

on

the grid normally holds the

to

R440

and

R442.

were order

kv.

B855, cathode current

is

to

reset rapidly, the sweep retrace would

the screen unless the

to

produce this rapid blanking, complex

as

simple as possible, the beam

on the fastest sweeps

POWER

CIRCUITS

due to the resonant circuit of

The

the secondary

produces approximately

is

connected

from

a voltage divider network

If

the supply voltage changes

in

high voltage.

R841,

which

focus

grid of the

and 8856,

are

and

focus

CRT.

at

a more negative point than the point

is

applied

INTENSITY

to

overcome the cut off bias

it Description-Type

the left hand deflection plate

designed

by

VSOO,

primary voltage of T

and

to

is

in

controls the voltage at the

from

obtained.

to

is

app

lied to

from

R441

through isola-

to

reset somewhat

CRT

is

very rapidly

until

the blanking

V424

then slowly

has

much

AND

operates

at

csoa

+20

kv

on

the secondary of V832

from

the plate of

at

the grid of

by

V8148

The

high voltage

V832

and

Four neon bulbs,

to

is

obtained

The

negative volt-

CRT

cut off

from

in

the absence

CRT

approxi-

which

CRT.

is

from

is

and the

801

approxi-

to

ground

prevent

until

the

V424

SUPPLY

applied to the high volt-

a tap

amplified

the screen voltage of

CRT.

used to regulate the cath-

grid voltages

affecting the operating

CRT

the cathode

control, however, has

V802,

4-15

519

held

more

The

the the

and

VSOO

from

the un-

suf-

is

Circuit

Description-Type

Vertical position i and applied through vertical deflection plate of the ages lor the divider networks.

LOW-VOLTAGE

ng

voltages are obtained

R867

CRT

ore also obtained

519

to

R868

POWER

CRT.

from

an

d the bypassed lower

Other operating

from

simple

SUPPLIES

R865

volt-

voltage

Primary Power

line voltage

is

pri

mary windings of

The

operation is

connected across one of the primary windings and

ates whenever the

Voltage

gizes the secondary windings of the transformer.

obtained

D650 heater supply. Negative heater supp After approximately a 45-second delay, the contacts of

K601 then energize is

to delay

scope circuits

heat. Relays power supply voltages

scope the ture inside the instrument becomes excessively

contacts of the thermal cutout, relays

oscilloscope

-250-Volt

Voltage obtained f

applied through a full-wave filter ply. negative output voltage trolled. the

A used to set the voltage on one of the grids of

voltage lator tube constant Th

is places

voltage on out of the power supply.

When the output voltage has been set, any change

that voltage produces o V646 age mol, start V639

applied through

two windings

are

and

in

series for

POWER

applied

at

from

terminals

and

D651

and

ly

is

applied

close,

thereby energizing

K603.

app

lication of power supply voltages to oscillo-

until

the tube filaments have had a chance to

K602

and

to

all

-250-volt

Power-Supply regulator circuits except

and

K602

and

K603

ci

rcu

i

ts.

Power

to the regulator circu By

varying the drop

The

greater the

less

t

he

output voltage of the power supply.

voltage

divider consisting of

on the other grid

V639

and

at

about

85

7 of

2 of

which constitutes

of the power supply becomes

as

for

additional load, the g r

to

rise.

Due

the

ch

ange

in

F601

and

SW601

T

601

.

Two

primary windings ore used.

connected

in

234-volt

operation.

sw

itch

is

the primary winding of

18,

19,

22

and

applied

to

energize the regulated

26.5

volts

to

the time delay relay

K602

.

The

-26.5-volt

and

The

purpose of the time delay relay

K603

control the applicat

to

the other circuits of the oscillo-

regulators. TK

602,

thereby remove power

to the

parallel

for

117-volt

The

blower

23

is

rectified by

the regu lated

contacts of

If

the

T60

ion

tempera-

high,

from

oper-

1 ener-

Voltage

K60

K602

of the

closed.

from

open to de-energize

Supply

ro

m terminals 6 and

it

of the

in

from

the power supply con be

voltage

is

determined

R633.

The

volts

by

V646

normally

V646

is

vo

ltage change

an

error signal.

to the constant voltage drop across

voltage

at

11

of

R647,

by

voltage

at

-165

R647

for

at

the grids of

If

th

e output

negative than

is

approximately 3

Power

V627A,

and

V646

V639

volts.

-250

V646

T60

V627A,

R648

.

act

bridge rectif ier circuit and

-250-Volt

voltage across

dropped across

R646,

voltage across

gas-tube regulator

set

by

less

id

voltages of

pin 7

1

Sup·

con-

reguholds

volts

volt-

no also

4-16

times greater than the change net change

in approximately 2/3 the change in the output voltage of the power supply. section

pin going signal. T furt to the grid of tive signal on the more heavily, thereby reducing the voltage drop across the tube supply to the normal

el all the regulator compensates crease in the output of the power supply voltage

not dependent on the operation of

Regulated Heater

1.

fr volts the collector of vider between voltage on the bose of Q766A. of Q7668 and Q766A and

the

compared against the voltage the

the

base of Q766B. and rection

the base of

is

of

the

Other

the

is

(Regula

The

-250-Volt tained reference voltage.

ion

.

output voltage devia tes

The

signal of a series regulator tube . applied to the series regulator the output

in

other circu

r-

ad is The of the particular

the voltage between the grids of

The

to

conduct

6

is

then appl i

his

her

amp

lified error signal

V627A

and

in

creasing the output voltage of the power

A tendency

for

iminated

in

the same manner except that the polarity of

the signa

ls

is

rem

ai

ns

at

The

-250-Volt

Voltage

for

the

om

terminals

18,

is

obtained

th

-250

is

set by a voltage divider between

ground. Because of the common

07668,

-26.5

volts changes,

applied through

which

returns

A voltage divider between

0767

stabil

izes

Regulator

Th

e other regulator

-250-Volt

Regulator and the

ted Heater Supply).

Supply

from

the

ou

is

then

amp

voltage

The

+475-Volt

its

in

iust

the output of the supply. A separate potentiometer

provided for each position of the

voltage

at

the grid of

at

la

rg

er change

mo

re

heavily. The amplified signa l a t

ed

to

the grid of

causes

V624

to

at

the plate of

as a positive-going signal.

grid

of

V627A

causes the tube to conduct

le

vel.

th

e power supply output to increase

reversed

from

the previous example.

for

either

the normal

level.

Regulator operates

K601,

Supply

Regu

l

ated

Hea

19,

from

e series

This

at

the

te

22,

and

23

of

0650

and 0651 and

regulator,

volts and ground sets the reference

The

the voltage

at

the bose of Q766A. If

on

error signal is produced at

er

ro

r signal

is

0773

to

the base of

th

e output voltage to normal.

-26

.5

app

r

ox

imately -

-12.6

volt

output f

Circuits

circ

u

its

are similar

Ea

ch

of the regulators

as

part of

its

tput of each supply

An

lified

back

Supply

that several potentiometers

R7

reference.

error

s1gnol

is

from

i

ts

normal value.

and

used to control the operation

The

polarity of the error s

is

always such as to bring

to

normal.

is

somewhat different

NANOSEC/CM

V724

can be

32

selected

by

2.

Consequently the

V646

at

7 causes that

V624

as a

negative-

cond

uct

less

and

V624

is

applied

The

an

in

crease or a de-

to

insure

th

at

all times, and

K602,

and

K603.

r

Supply is obtained

T601.

Negative 35

applied

am.

A voltage

voltage

on

the base

-26

.5 volts

emiHer

resistor for

the bose of

Q766B

amplified by

07668

om

in

the

volts and ground sets

13

volts.

The

emitter

ro

m

th

e supply.

in

operati

-26

on

.5-Volt

Regulator

uses

Voltages ob-

are

compared

produced when the

The

error

ig

from

are

used

sw

ad

justed by means

the

NANOSEC/CM

posi-

Thus

to

it

is

the

is

the

is

to

di

-

is

th

e

di-

to

t

he

a

na

l

the

to

ch.

switch. By setting the det

ermines

outp

ut

vol

SC

C

{CM

control by means of the respective

rect sweep timing on t

CALIBRATION-STEP

Reed Switch

A mechanical dry-reed

are

used to produce the output steps from t

St

ep

Generator. The charge line

sulated,

rigid coaxial line with a

of

125

ohms

T

he

reed switch is located inside the char

part

of

t

he

Charging voltage

vol

ta

ge

divider

charging

netwo

dete

rm

ines

RANGE

swit

pli

ed

to

the

tions

of

t

he

from

R879

line.

In

th

c

ha

rg

ing

voltage

ometer,

1!:87 Calibration half

of the charging voltage.

As

the dry metal reed

ta

n

ce

of

c

apa

citance line. This would have a tendency the output this e

ff

ect.

from

the

li

cant amount.

Wh

en the switch con a 125-ohm sour a result only th

e ou tput 125-ohm load.

t

act

s close, a backwave

line t

ow

a rd the charging network.

te

rm

i

na

te

th the charging network. T re

latively cons

lin

e,

after which the charges. When the switch con line

and

(883

nel~

o

rk

to

a

ga

m.

The charging network con charge line lengt

hs

of

charge

interool

ch

nected

to

the end

A 125-ohm trigger takeoff

obta

in a triggering signal for the oscilloscope sweep.

trigger

takeoff

output-voltage

th

e output voltage of the power sup

tage

is

ad

iu

sted an ea ch setting

ha

t range.

divider ratio,

GENERATOR

and

Charge

Line

sw

it

ch

and associated

is

o polystyrene-foam

ch

ara

and

o one-way transit time of 1.5 nanoseconds.

125-ahm system.

far

th

networks

rk

to

the charge line. T

th

e polar

ity

of the charging vo

ch

determines the magnitude of the volt

VO

LT

S

control,

RANGE

switch, the charging voltage

is

applied

through R882

e

VAR

IABLE

position of the

is

obtained from the

5.

The amplitude of the output steps from

-S

tep

Generator into o 125-ohm

it

ar

swi

s contacts increases consid

at

the contacts draws

pulse

unless some provision

Capac

itor C883

ne

from affecting the amplitude by any

ta

cts close, the charge line acts

ce

supplying energy to a 125-ohm load.

h

alf

of

the charging volt

e backwave

and

he

ta

nt for twice the transit time of t

ou

tput amplitude d eca

are

slowly

th

e

init

ial voltage

in

the instrument.

line

and

ge

line. The charging network

of

the additional

is

identical in

cter

e

ch

arg

e line

and

app

li

ed

he

1!:879

.

In

the

and

R883 RANGE

tc

h starts

to

er

charge

to

affect the a mplitu

is

ts the cha r

age

At

the some time that the con-

is

propagat

ed down t

Resis

to

thus eliminate a reflection f

output step amplitude remains

ta

cts

again

rechar

ged

through the charging

before the contacts

be

disconnect

Th

is

permits

other devices to

charge

is

used

in

th

fu

nction to t

®

pl

y. The

of

th

e

NANO-

R732

far

ch

arge

he

Ca

li

bration-

is

tic impeda nce

ge

li

ne

and

forms

is

obtained fr

thr

oug

h o

special

POLARITY

switch

ltage

and

ag

e

I V

and

10V

obta

to the charge

sw

it

ch the

VARIABLE

potenti-

load

is

exact

close, the

capaci-

ab

ly

. T

he

added

out of the charge

de

made to reduce

ge

drawn

sig

oppeors across

he

charge

r

R883

is used

he

charge

ys

as

C883 dis-

open, the charge

close

ed

from a fixed

addi

tional

be

added

to

is

th

en

li

ne.

e charge

li

ne

he

trigger

tok

R732

o

ff

at

ob

tains o suitable triggering

propag

co

r-

The erator because of the Oppeor importa in

order to prevent reflections the switch. c

ate

is

selected because of the swit requirements

line

in-

Oscillator

An produce the output steps. T tubes

om

T

he

can

be

t

he

stages of trio

ap-

maintain oscillations. T

posi-

very high, resulting

ined

ment of

settings of which the the frequency of the oscillator.

th

e

ly

of

nifi-

as As

to

rom

the

con-

to

The

F

ig

.

4·12

•

raloro

e-

Circuit

the

ve

rtical

input of the oscilloscope. T

ated

dow

n

dry m

et

al r

to be part

nt

that

the switch be part of

Us

e

the design

ch

is

frequently quite short because

of

t

he

oscillator

is

V885

and

V895A.

basic cir

cu

seen from the sim plified diagram

de

th

e

FREQUENCY

R892A

peak

positive feedback occurs

. Simplifi• d

•cillotar.

signal

th

e charge line.

eed

is

used

in

relative

ease

of

o

12

5-ohm transmission line.

and

of

a mercury switch would fur

of

the transmission sys te

of

i

ts

excellent

appl

ication.

used

to

drive t

he

it

is

that of o Wien-Bridge

amp

lif

i

ca

ti

on provide gain necessary

he

amp

litude

in

highly

cli

co

ntrol

and

R892B.

T

hi

ci

rcuit

dia

gram

of

Description--Type

he

from

the backwave

the

Calibration-Step of making

the

125-ohm system

mismatches occuring

th

er

m.

The d

wavefor

m.

T

he

of

the severe

reed switch

and

oscillator

is

composed o f

Osci

ll

in

Fig.

4-12. Two

of

the

oscillations

pp

ed

waveforms. simultaneously varies s shifts the frequency

and

thus changes

+225

....

th

•

Colibrallon.St•p

takeoff

switch

compliry lifetime

th

ator,

Adi

4-17

519

Ge

n-

It

is

at

reed

ere

by

as to

is

ust-

th

e

at

G• n-

519

e

cription-Typ

es

D

rcuit

Ci

token fro m the

is

e output of the

Th

pentacle V885.

. The amount of current passing through

L885

ned

rmi

te actuates

nor

In

justed

ad reed switch (approximately

the

near

the

duces

amount of drive which must

the

When

the

to current from coil causes the reed

oscillator

is

current

Plate

RBBS.

of

setting

the

by

the frequency

at

reed

the

l operation, the

ma

the mechanical resonant frequency

near

natural resonant frequency

tendency for the contacts

DRIVE

the

SINGLE

R886

equency o f

fr

700

rotated

is

control

position, SW885

CLOSURE

through L885. The current through the

close once.

to

GENERATOR

RATE

divided through

The field set

osci

the

of

the

cycles). Operation

800

to

reed

the

of

bounce

to

provided

be

counterclockwise

fully

Multivibrator

form o free-running

V89SB

and

V915

Tubes circuit which Rate Generator. For

this circuit, we

of

tion

applied

is

power switch is set to

of V9158

ode

the

en

betwe

conducts, its plate voltage drops causing o decrease

V915A in voltage

coupled through

is tube off. The resulting incr

is

B

V895

iving V915A farther into conduction. Capacitor

dr then discharges through of V8958 to slowly rise. When comes insufficient to hold conduction. The time

by

mined

obtained

voltages

en V895B conducts, the

Wh

led to the grid of V915A, causing

coup

used

is

Xl

and

plate

the cathode of

at

coupled to

the values

from

to

the

will

the

to

his

. T

the grid of of V8958

C920A

the

that

of

R923

control the re

purpose

circuit

connects

to t

R925

V895B

C920A,

assume

and

V915B. he

ease

grid

and

V89SB

.

drop

ond

V89SB

gr

of

the

R925

of

C920A between

in

cut o

ition rote of

pet

laining the

exp

V915A

that

the

hat

t

connects

and

d

ri

the g

drop

The

V895B,

of

id

plate

the

V9\SA through

permitting the grid

R923

charge

V895B

,

ff

remains cut off is

R923

nd

, a

plate

in its

V915A

R885 l885 up

ator

ll

oscillator

switch

ond

LBBS.

by

doses

ltivibrotor

mu

conducts

MULTIPLIER

V915A.

of

in cutting the voltage

C920A be-

on

goes

and

voltage

to cut off.

the

causes

This

of

plate

to rise, coupling a positive signal to

ond

drive V8958 farther into conduction. The time t

-

de

is

by

of

reduces

sending

l885

is

the

re·

is

is held cut off

through

ge

dischar

to

grid of

the

es,

arg

ch

back

me

co

to

tube aga

mined by the switch values of and time swing of V9158, of

of the multiv ibr

cy

another

n,

i

The frequency o f the multivibralor operation

va

by the setting

end

C920

remain cut off. The setting of R923 affects t

V895B

that

he

t

at

V895B

follower

Cathode

at

Avalanche Circuit

The output pulses from

the

plied through C930

-

the

voltage

opera

cath-

C9208

C9208 C920A

deter-

by

as

As

at

into

the

is

SET

AVALANCHE

the

to

093-4

of

When

avalanching.

as

multivibrotor

cause

to

enough

charge

fixed

he

t

pulse

of t he output line,

The components fully shape drive a

and

imately

approx

or

used with the instrumen

output from

he

T

terminate the discharge of

the output waveform. The circuit con

50-ohm l

front

the

on

nector

of

le

samp

A

to

applied

the

permits

his

T

without

generator

rote

pl

determined by the time required for C9208

cl

lues of

affect the period

remains cut off

red

clockwise

or

control

po

V915A

093-4 li

odded

oad

the output pulse

the

oscilloscope

and

R929

R928,

end

es

ris

V915A

into conduction. When

is

operation

of

e

selected by the

C920

CYCLES/SEC

the

of

and

e amplitude

th

ing

uc

the

of

end

serves to couple

also

V915B

the avalanche circuit through

to

multivibrator circuit o re

the

collector

to the

adjusts the

R931

t where the transistor is just short

in

a positive pulse

ts off, the additional

cu

anche,

l

ava

to

collector

in the

ne

transit time

the

is twice

nanoseconds for

10

t.

token from the emitter circuit.

is

0934

to the emitter circuit a re used

the

directly from the

panel.

is

triggering circuit

be

to

external patching

any

grid of

the

As

R911.

lly

eventua

V915A

itiated.

in

that

time

controls the output

drive to

of

/

CYCLES

circuit of

collector

ed

i

pl

ap

is

thereby d ischargi

rcuit. T

ci

of

the

ge

char

TE

+RA

thr

developed

the

of

eas

triggered

of

V895B

hat

C920B

permits

MUL

contro

both

SEC

the

0934.

vo

he

the

charge

line

be

50 0 con-

ough

osci

ily

he

t

V915A

conducts

de

is

TIPUER

l.

V915A

the

control.

outp

vol

from t

age

lt

ra

du

ch

and

used

oscope.

ll from the

signa ls.

V915B

of

cathode

the

and

V915A

of

ate

grid

C930.

tage

arge

R939

disthe

te

T

ap The

tion

li

to

r-

he

ut

-

of

he

is

ng

ne

to to to

4-18

®

PREVENTIVE

Air

Filter

The

Type 519 Oscilloscope

a

washable

filter

The filter

is

If the filter becomes excessively dirty,

wool. the flow

of

air into the instrument

heating. High internal temperatures will not only reduce

the lifetime

of

cause

the thermal cutout

exper

iment.

Any

filter should

be

The filter should

II

should

be

more often

if required.

loose dirt by topping the filter gently on a Then

wash

the

until

it

is

clean. After rinsing

the filter with

coot

" {products These products a re generally suppliers.

MAINTENANCE

is

cooled

by

located

constructed of

the instrument components but may also

to

time that the thermal cutout opens, the

checked immediately.

be

visually checked every

cleaned

at

least

To

filter by running hot

on

adhesive of

the Research Products Corporation).

air drown through

at

the

rear

of the instrument.

adhesive-coated

it will

and

may

cause

open

at

a crucial point

three

or

hard

soapy

water

allowing

it

"Hondi-Koter"

from air-conditioner

lew

lour months,

through

to

every

cleon the filter, first remove the

and

such

as

available

aluminum

restrict

over-

in

weeks.

surface.

dry,

or

"Fi

Cleaning the Exterior

loose

dust accumulating on t

con

be

removed with o lint-free

br

ush

. The point brush is particularly useful lor dislodging

and

around

dust on dampened

with gent Abrasive

move the four sl

and

position the groticule

mask assembly. CRT alcohol.

reversing the

Removal

removed

water

con

be

used

cleansers should not

To

clean

the

groticule

otted

mask assembly. Then unscrew the knurled knob used

with o soft, lint-free cloth

The groticule

cover

order

of

Panels

The side, top,

and

separately

he

outside of

the

doth

or a small point

the front-panel controls. A soft cloth

and

a small

amount

be

the

dampened

used.

face

harder

and

the

of liquid deter-

coating of dirt.

of the

CRT,

remove the cover

the

lace

with

denatured

ore

remounted

Type 519 con

to

remove the

and

groticule nuts

and

remove the groticule from the

Clean

the graticule

and

mask assembly

of their removal.

bottom panels of

for maintenance work. The side panels

Type 519

first re-

of

SECTION

MAINTENANCE

ore

held

in

place

the side panels, use a screwdriver

fasteners

pull carrying handles. Top by small screws. After first removing and

Cleaning the Interior

Although

may

an

should

failures midity conditions. Perhaps the best

terior

compressed

avoided,

ponents. Persistent di

it

or

a small point brush.

coat

Special attention should

lter-

circuits, including ports inside the high

most of ent plastic box, very little dust should accumulate

ports. excessive dust combined with high hvmidity con arc

ing ing will normally particularly lor

A cloth

clean dirt

around con ceramic strips.

Visual Inspection

to

Many potential

by a visual inspection of the instrument. For this reason,

the

you should perform a complete the instrument shovld

by

work.

Defects which things the knobs nectors, improperly

be

burned ports,

most of these troubles

by small screwheod fasteners. To remove

approximately

the

upper

bottom panels

penetrate

be due

of

however,

the

If

dvst

and

the

be

used lor cleaning

also

as

two turns counterclockwise. Then

portion

of

the panels

and

bottom panels

can

be

lifted off.

air

entering the Type 519

into

the

interior of removed occasionally to the conductivity of the dust under high hu-

the instrument clean

air

. A very high velocity

to

high-voltage ports

does

accumulate

possible high-voltage failures. Presence of arc-

cause

X20

trigger gain .

dampened and

dust off the high

anode

of the

and

is

calibrated

be

made

may

loose

or

broken connections, loose set screws

or

shalt

covplers, loose

seated

and

broken terminal strips. The remedy lor

the

is

to

prevent

damage

rt

con

be

removed using a

be

given to the high-vo l

ore

it

should

false triggering of the instrument,

in

denatured

alcoho

voltage

CRT.

A colton-tipped

in

narrow

spaces

existent troubles con

visual check every time

or

repaired. Visual checks

during other routine maintenance

be

detected

or

tubes

or

is

apparent.

or

coin

to

rotate the

outward

from the

ore

held

in

the

screws, the

is

filtered, some dust

instrument. This dust

to

prevent instrument

way

to keep the blow dust off using air

stream should

to

some of the com-

damp

voltage

box. Since

enclosed

in

a transpar-

on

be

removed, since

produce

l may

be

used

anode

lead

applicator

and

lor cleaning

be

detected

visvally inclvde such

damaged

coaxial con-

transistors, scorched

However, particular

5

place

cloth

tage

these

and

5-1

top

in-

be

to

in

or

Mainte

nance-Typ

e

51

9

core

must

be detected. Overheating of parts less determine the cause of overheating before replacing damaged

sealed. No additional lubrication of the instrument.

Tube

Oscilloscope cases indicate a tube to be defective when tha t tube operating quite satisfactory cate tube defects cuits. whether or not the tube it rectly, of tubes less

taken when heat-damaged components are

apparent, defects

parts

in

Blower

Motor

The

blower motor

is

often the result of ather,

in

the circuit.

It

is

order to prevent further damage.

bearings

are

factory lubricated and

is

required for the

Checks

Period

ic

tube chec ks

on

the tubes

us

are

not recommended. Tube testers

which

The ultimate criterion of the usability of a tube

does not, then

it

should

it

should not be replaced. Unnecessary replacement is

not

on

ly expensive but may also result

recalibration of the instrument.

ed in the Type 519

in

a circuit, and

affect the performance of the

works

properly

be

replaced.

If

essential that you

heat-

in

many

foil

to

indi-

in

the

circu

it

is

working

in

need-

. cor-

Recalibration

The

Type 519

Oscilloscope

is

alter

months

if

used intermittently). A com-

REPLACEMENT

a stable instrument that

each

500

hours of

oper-

is

given

in

OF

PARTS

will

provide many hours of trouble-free operation. However, to insure the reliability of measurements we suggest that you

recalibrote the instrument ation

[or

every plete stepCalibration Procedure section of this manual.

six

by

-step calibration procedure

REMOVAL

AND

General Information

Most

ports

in

the Type 519

Oscilloscope

can

be

without detailed be removed lions for the removal of some of these parts a re contained in inst you operation. this

Removal

shield unit, input coaxial cable board.

instr

uctions.

if

the

following

rument, replacement of certain parts

recalibrate portions of the

Refer

manual

for

of

If

it

becomes necessary

should

first

disconnect

Di

sconnect the

Other parts, however, can

a definite procedure

paragraphs. Because of the nature of the

oscilloscope

to the Calibration Procedure portion of

th

e

app

licable calibration steps.

Cathode-Ray

be

removed

all

and

Tube

to

replace the

as

a single unit.

leads to the

terminat

CRT

socket f

ion

is

followed. Instruct-

will

to

insure proper

CR

T,

the

To

CRT.

Disconnect the

from

the mounting

rom

the

CRT

replaced

require

CRT

remove the

bose by

best

th

and

5-2

pressing back on the plastic flanges attached of the socket. ing is

which hold the groticule cover

Remove supports of the CRT loscope, taking extreme core of exposed hardware. CRT

life

lutely necessary. Separation desirable due damage to exposed tube pins a um. installed.

Installation

into the instrument,

is

lowing the color code information printed on the shield. Then

c

ir

tion. Replace the mask

is

making certain the serial numbers of the

If

agree. After rep lacing the vertical sensitivity to determine with the figure voltage however, any supply or high-voltage supply t

ivity. trace with the horizontal groticule markings and check the calibration of the sweeps with the 1 Detailed instructions for completing these steps can found

Replacement

the

mas re switches used entire switch should be replace from

some special care loosen the shaft coupling port for the switch. Disconnect the two metal supports far the switch chassis. Unsolder ing o careful drawing of the lead connections.

at

lock slide sible to remove the switch

versing the order of the steps required far removal. wiring in

Tube

maintenance that tubes

The

first

free of the

assembly through the front-pone/ opening of the

can then be removed

CRT's

With the

Methods for removal of defective

t part, obvious,

qu

ir

ed

Be

cause of the complexity of the

nut the switch out of the support.

The

the new switch.

sockets can be worked loose

on

one flange

and

then the othe r

CRT.

Remove the four

and

the graticule cover and

CRT

shield

to

(1)

are shipped

of

CRT

and shield reinserted and the shield bolted

small

connect the anode lead, coaxial cable,

on

the

ma

y be necessary to correct the deflection foetor;

futu

re

Ad

j

ust

the

AXIS

in

the

Calibration Procedure

of

Switches

and

.

Single

wafers

in

the Type 519.

Tektronix, either wired or unwired, as desi

is

Then

all

which

holds

NANOSEC/CM

diagram made during removal can

mask assembly

mask.

and

gently remove the complete

from

the shield

from

the shield

cost of the tube and

nd

res

from

the factory with o shield already

leads can

be

in

the graticule cover

CRT

and mask, recheck the

if

this

mask.

A slight adjustment

ad

justment of either the

will

affect the vertical

ROTATION

KMC

section of this manual.

only a norma l amou

are

normally not replaced

If

one wafer

d.

Switches

NANOSEC/CM

required to remove this switch.

just

in

front of the forward

slide the coupling down the shaft.

leads coming

to

the switch

in

the front support, and

It

from

the

ins

trument.

switch should

Replacements

Care

sho

uld

be tak

en

both

in

preventive

are

nat replaced unless they

to

each side

by

until

the socket

slotted graticule

in

Disconnect the rear

on

ly

if

is

usually

(2)

possibility of

ultant loss of

reconnected

and

termina-

assembly

CRT

and

measurement agrees

in

-250-vo

control to a l

ign

Tim

ing Standard.

switches are,

for

nt

of core

is

defective, the

co

n be ordered

re

d.

from

the switch while

Remove

should then be

be

replaced

be

used to wire

and

corrective

press-

place.

oscil-

abso-

vacu-

by

mask

high

sensi-

in

switch,

sup-

mak-

by

First

pos-

nuts

The

are

un-

fol-

lt

the

be

th

e

is

the

the the

re

-

®

actually causing trouble. Many times during routine nance

it

will

be necessary

Tor

their sockets.

It to the same sockets unless they Unnecessary replacement

necessitate recolibrati

quire replacement,

by previously checked high-quality tubes.

To anode strap out of the way. the socket.

Replacing

The

be

Remove PU nector the attached coax assemb ly. about Disassemble the O reed switch. Grip the long-nosed pliers

To ohm sleeve. Insert one e nd of the assemb the other end of the reed switch into the center conductor located inside the tube. look through the the side of the tube to ore properly connected . Align the

Fig. Co

uplin t

ub

is

replace

V331,

strop of the tube

the Reed Switch

reed switch

replaced

as

follows:

the four mounting screws which

T

125

0

connector to the front pane/. Grasp the

and

pull

straight out

18"

long a

install

the replacement reed switch, remove the

connector double button assembly

ly

and

use

S-

1.

Ex

plod

ed vi

g

Nut,

and

e whe n t he

reed

•witc h is r

you

important that these tubes

on

it

is

first

in

nd

contains the reed switch (see

UT

and

the button assembly as a holder.

LoccQd

ew

Re

ta

ini ng

ore

or

switching

of the instrument.

recommended that they be replaced

loosen the screws which hold the

in

place.

Then

The

tube can t

the Calibration-Step Genera t

from

the front panel to extract

The

P

UT

1

25

n

connector to expose the

metal

end of the reed switch

pull

the reed switch out.

re

ed switc h

see

that the switch

slots

SNAP

ltiNG

--coupling

of

the

co

ox

tub e

a

Nul

n

ee

d n

epl

ace

d.

to

remove tubes

be

actually deTective.

oT

tubes

If

tubes

rotate the anode

hen

be

pulled

hold

complete

assembly

from

the connector

in

to the button

small

and

in

the connector

nul.

ue

mbly . The

ot

be re m

oved

mainte-

from

returned

will

often

do

from

or

the

OUT-

Fig.

hole

conductor

Sn

op

Ri

from the

con-

5-1). wi

125-

Plug

®

Maintenance-Type

ports and reassemble the connector.

assembly through the front

PUT

125

n

connector so that the

position as the

insures that the connector ot the rear of the coox tube

re-

assembly

wi

ll

of the instrument. Mount the OUT

securely

to

the front

Soldering

Precautions

In

the p roduction of Tektronix instruments a special silver-bearing solder ceramic terminal strips. T peated

use

of ordinary tin-lead solder, or by excessive

heating of the terminal strip with a soldering iron.

can

sional

use

of ordinary

unless excessive heat

If

you

frequently perform work on Tektronix instruments,

it

is

advisable that

about

3%

is

th

in

ng,

silver.

printed

circu

itry and also be purchased directly rolls;

order

by

Because of t terminal strips, on

your soldering iron. These tips

directly

to

the solder amount of heat required . heat as possible while producing

Due

to the high-frequency requirements of the Type 519, many of the components are soldered short

le

a

ds.

This When these components o again be mode for soldering and unsoldering short-lead components quires:

(1)

the securely between the component heat

is

applied,

(2)

the

use

of manipula

ti

on

of the

Ceramic

Term

Dam

a

ge

d ce

by

unsoldering

rubber

mallet con be done yokes protruding through the chassis. yokes con then be removed as o unit. T probably

co

me out wi

be

pulled

out separately afterwords.

Another wa y of removing the terminal strip agonal cutters to cut off the side of the yoke holding the strip.

This

method permits the strip to be removed fr

a difficult

area

The

remainder of the yo kes end the spacers can be out separately after the removal of the strip. placement strip old

yokes need

con be used

at

panel

while holding the

EXTERNAL

mote

This

port number

he

shape

you

is

necessa

as

short as possible. T use

allowing

a

hot ir

flanges

TRIGGER

properly

wi

th

the connector

panel

with

the four screws.

is

used

to

establish a bond to the

his

bond may be broken

50-50

solder

is

you

may

of long-nose pliers to hold the lead

wi

applie

d.

hove o stock of solder containing

type of solder

is

generally available

from

Tektronix

25

1-514.

of the terminals of the ceramic wish

to

use

allow

in

the terminals and reduces the

It

is important to

a

fu

ry

to reduce the lead inductance.

re

replaced, the leads shou ld

and

the pliers

to

on

for

o short

leads

to prevent lead brea k

inal Strips

ra

mic

te

r

min

al strips

all

connections, then using a plastic or hard

to

knock

by

using the

where the

is

supplied with yokes already

no

t be salvaged.

least twice before new ones need be ordered.

ore

th

e yokes out of the chassis.

mallet

to

th

t

he

yokes.

If

mallet cannot

Ho,~ever,

Inser

t the coax tube

ore

in

the same

125

n

connector.

at

the r

PUT

1

25

n

connector

ll

not break the bond

is

used quite often

locally. It

in

one-pound

a wedge-shaped tip

you to apply heat

use

as

ll-flow

joint.

in

place with very

he

proper technique

the point where the

serve

as

a heat

ti

me;

and

(3)

careful

age

mo

st ea

sily

removed

hit

the ends of the

The

strip with the two

he

spacers

not, the

spacers

is

to

use

be

used effecti

Since

attached, the

the old

spacers

by

Occa-

pu

a

519

OUT-

may

little

sin .

This

ve

5-3

This

wi con

ll

ear

re-

in

re-

k;

ll

di-

om

l

y. ed re-

Ma

inte

nance-Type

When the dam a removed, place the spacers into the holes Then

set the ends of the yoke press or ta p lightly directly yoke pins down through the spacers . yoke pins a pair of diagona l cutters, cut off the portion of the yoke pin

protruding through the spacers.

the ceramic strip ports

Fig.

S-2.

519

ged

strip

and

yoke assembly has been

in

pins

into the spacers. Then

above

the yokes to drive the

Be

ore

driven completely through the spacers.

fi

t together.

~

Chas

sis

1nolallalionofc&rami

c l•rmlna l sldps.

certain that the

Fig.

5-2

Spoc

.,

Y

ohPi

the chassis.

Using

shows how

n

TROUBLESHOOTING

General Troubleshooting Information

This

portion of the Instruction Manual includes informa-

will

tion that

troubleshooting work, you should correlate information tained

first recheck the settings of set what effect, or abnormal operation o f each control firmly establish the trouble symptoms

of o control can

enable you to more efficiently troubleshoot

the Type 519

in

the event that a trouble develops. During

in

this section with information obtained from other

manual.

parts of the

When o trouble occurs

properly. Then

if

location of a troub le which occurs only

the trouble symptoms.}

After the trouble symptoms

firs

t for the obvious causes of the trouble. Check to see

that the pilot light

ion

of the controls; listen for any unusual sound; see that

t the tube

fi

laments

ment.

The

type of trouble

In

general, a troubleshooting procedure con be thought

of as consisting of two parts; circuit isolation troubleshooting.

will

enable you to accomplish the first part of the

lined

You

procedure. the trouble

in does not enable you to isolate the defective circuit, then additional checks cuit has been determined, de tailed checks within the circuit will

allow you to determine the e xact cause of the trouble.

in

the instrument, you should

all controls to see that they ore

operate

the front panel controls to see

any, they have on the trouble . The normal

in

usually be determined immediately from

are

clearly established, look

is

on; fee l for irregularities

are

lit;

visual

ly

check the entire

will

indicate the checks to make.

In

many cases, the general procedure out-

hove then only to find the exact cause of

the isolated circuit. H the

w

ill

be require

d.

After the defective cir-

wi

ll

allow you to

your mind.

in

certain pos itions

in

the opera-

and

above

procedure

con-

instru-

circuit

5-4

T abies

5-2

and

5-3

519.

Table particular circuit or stage. the trouble Table

5-2

Table

S-3.

trouble

ble only those troubl Troubles not found general method of first isolating the defective then determining the cause of the troub le within the stage.

Table The steps used to perform a quick check on the operation of circuit. the major circuits contained you

are

you can proceed d irect

Table

5-3

Although the Type 519

possible for circuits to get out of calibration thereby producing on detailed trouble analysis be sure

be corrected by means of some adjustment. doubt, recalibrate the entire suspect

formation

Unusual troubles may occur

the power suppl

the Type 519 make voltage to affect one circuit more than others.

quently, a power supply trouble should be considered as a

possibility

in the instrument.

power

regul

ated

proceeding with the troubleshooting procedure. If the

and

put

ore correct, the power supplies con be assumed to be

ating correctly.

When complete visual check of that circuit. Many troubles can be found most to detect the cause of the trouble, check the tubes used

(The

in the circuit by substitution . Approximately troubles which occur tube failures. to their original sockets.

Transistor defects either opening or shorting. amplifiers, signal-tracing around the suspected transistors should first also be intercha nged. A transistor-curve . display instrument, such as the Tektronix Type 575, can also be of help in

finding abnormal transistor difficulties. However, power supply circuits such as the failures con be located with on ohmmeter. A check for open or shorted transistors con be made using on ohmmeter. Use of the however, because the low resistance

and

sistor age

to a good transistor. Checks should be mode with the ohmmeter leads connected both ways across the transistor so that the effects of the pola

can be used to troubleshoot the Type

5-2

is

used first to

isolate

5-3

in

direct you to the appropria te step or steps

It

5-3

in Tab

The

able

without first using Table

apparent

in

Section

in

supply may be causing the trouble, the power-supply

voltages

ripple voltages of the regulated power supplies

trouble has been isolated to a circuit, perform a

easily by visual means.

R X 1 scale of the ohmmeter should

the

Table

the

isolated

circuit or stage. References

is

clearly not practical to include every possi-

in

the troubleshooting ta bles,

es

most

likely

in

con also be used independently of T

le

5-3

table

is

to immediately isolate trouble to a circuit,

6.

ies

. Also, the circuit configurations used

it

virtually any type of failure which may occur

If there

and

Be

sure to return

be

done. The plug-in trigger amplifiers may

voltage

to occur ore included.

the tables must

are

arranged

subdivided into

in

the instrumen t so that

ly

to the appropriate section of

5-2.

is

a stable instrument,

trouble. Before proceeding with any

that

ed

due

to a failure in one of

possible for on incorrect power -supply

is

any

doubt as to whether a

ripple should be checked before

in

Tek

tronix instruments result from

any

tubes found to be good

ly

take the form o f the transistor

usual

In

the case of the trigger

-26.5-volt

source could conceivably cause dam-

rity

reversal of the volta

certain troubles to a

is

then used to locate

and

therefore

be

located using the

stage

and

able

so that they con be

separate

each

sections for

the trouble ca nnot

If

there

is

circuit using the

Conse-

oper-

it

If a visual check fails

90% of the

supply, most

be

avoided,

in

series with the tran-

5-2.

any

out-

in in

if

is

in-

in

ge

across the transistor con be observed. about

whether a transist

other transist

the voltages

that before making the substitution. wi

thout first checking out the circui t, the new transistor may

immediately be

Separate in the back provides

on reference designation instrument portant voltages of the reference designations associated with

Numbers than 100 .

100 numbers 200 numbers .

300

and

600

and

800

numbers . .

900 numbers . . . . . . . Rate

Switch wafers shown on the circuit diagrams to indicate the position of the wafer on the actual switches. The number portion of the

on

the switch assembly. Wafers

of

the switch to the rear. The letters F

front whether the front form the particular switching function.

AU

wiring circuit tracing. The following code; the widest stripe identifies the first color in the code.

or

for

it

in

the circuit.

and

loads on the transistor

damaged

by some defect

circuit diagrams for

of

this manual.

overall picture of instrument operation. The

of

each electronic component

is

shown on the circuit diagrams

and

waveforms. The following

less

..

. . . . .

...

. Trigger Processing Channel

.......

. . Triggering Circuits

...

..

400

numbers . . Time-Bose

700 numbers

..

. . . . .

or

the rear of the wafer

in

the Type 519 is color coded to facilitate

power-supply buses

If

there

or

nat, substitute an-

Be

sure first, however,

ore

is

substituted

in

the circuit.

circuit

ore

contained

as

well

each

Gate

and

Un-

Generator

and

Calibration-

r

ore

numbered from the

and

R indicate

is

used to per-

are

identified by the

is

is o list

is

good

If

a transistor

each

In

addition, a block diagram

Time-Bose blonking

Low-Voltage Power Supplies CRT

Circuit

Generator

Step

Generato

code

refers to the wafer number

ore

doubt

normal

in

as

circuit.

coded

+ 650 v

........ .

+475

v ...... .

+450v +225v + 1

00v

-250

v . . . . . .

-26

.5 v . . . ....... . Red-blue

the

-14

v . ....... . . . . Block-yellow on white

im-

-

12.6v

.......

In

the troubleshooting

mode

in

several places to the use of on oscilloscope to

check the waveform

extremely short times involved

of the forms throughout the instrument, use a wide-bond ins

trument such o minimum. used, such

TABLE S-

SWEEP RATE

2NSEC/CM 5NSEC/CM

10NSEC/CM I 20

NSEC/CM I 35

SONSEC/CM lOONSEC/CM 22 200NSEC/

SOONSEC/CM

1000 NSEC/CM

Maintenance--

..

Blue-green-brown on white

.. ..

Yellow-violet-brown on white

...

Yellow-green-brown on white

...

Red-red-brown on whi te

.....

Brown-block-brown on white

...

. . Red-green-brown on dark background

on

dark background

. . . Block-orange on white

tab

les t hat follow, reference

at

some point

in

the circui t. Because

in

many

of

it

is

VOLTAGE

UPPER LIMIT LOW

135

I

80

I

60

45 35

I

30 25

]

25 25

I

necessary that you

oscilloscope for these checks. A 30-mc

as

the Tektronix 540-series oscilloscopes

If

possible, a 100-mc oscilloscope should be

as

the Tektronix Type 580-series instruments.

1.

V331 SCREEN

I I NO RMAL

I A

VERAGE

'

115

65

50

25

CM

18 15 13

Type

the wove-

NORMAL

ER LIM

95 50 40 25 15

14

10

5

519

is

IT

®

5-5

Maintenance--Type

TROUBLE

1.

Pilot

light and tube

aments

do

not

2.

Pilot

light does not

alter

normal time delay.

No de power.

3. No

spot

or trace on

screen of

oscilloscope.

4.

Trace not focused properly.

trace geom-

5.

Incorrect etry.

5-6

519

fil-

ligh

t. plied.

dim

er

screen.

erator. High-Voltage

CRT

ASTIGMA CUS correctly.

GEOMETRY misadjusted. cuit.

TABLE

PROBABLE

CAUSES

OF

TROUBLE

line power not op-

Fuse

F601. er switch Power T601

-250-Volt ply.

K602, K603,

Beam ed off screen.

circuit. Unblonking cui!

Power

Pow-

SW601.

Transformer source.

.

Power

Sup-

-

26

.5-Volt

Pow-

Suppl

y.

K601,

TK602.

positioned off

Beam

deflect-

CRT

.

Time

-

Bose

Gen-

Supply.

Loose

Socket.

TI

SM

or

controls not set

CRT

Cir

cui

control

CRT

Cir-

5-2

,

CIRCUIT

ISOLATION

IF

CHECK

Check

to see tho!

cilloscope

is

properly fective. ably defective.

connected to power

Then

check for

correct

line

voltage between terminals 1 and 4 of

T601.

1.

Check

fo

r volts ot output of relays. 2. the -26.5-Volt

Supply.

2. volts

-250

ply.

1.

TUDE

trol

cir-

free

Turn

trace should appear.

2. put signals. Set

IZONTAL

clockwise. Ground vertical positioning

plate

CR should appear.

3. Set trol the sweep, and short ceed to step 56 of between tal A on

FO-

Ad ASTIGMAT

t.

trois Operating tions. Trace focus

Set tr CALIBRATION dure. Adjustment should

-26

Power

Check for

at

output of

-Volt Power Sup· Proceed to step

Set

PULSE

AMPLI

OR

SYNC

fully

clockwise to

run

the sweep.

up

in

tensity. A

Disconnect any

HOR-

control fully

at

neck

T.

A spot or trace

VERTICAL

to

midrange. Stop

th

e horizon-

deflection plates.

spot

should

appear

the screen.

just

FOCUS

I

SM

as

described

Instruc-

should

properly.

GEOMETRY

ol

as described

proce-

co

rrect trouble.

NORMAL

os-

T601

is

probably de-

.5

Check

power supply

250

Tro

uble

is

Volt

Power

of

Table

5-3.

Adjust the

control brightness, then stop the sweep by setting the

FUNCTION

to

PULSE

AMPLITUDE

SYNC

control counterclockwise. spot

and disappear. strument

norma

lly

.

blonking fective; proceed to step

54

of

in-

The

vertical positioning circuit tive.

Check

R86

7,

and

of

Tro

uble

Bose

Generator.

Tab

le

5-3.

in

Instrument

in

ing cor rectl

for

trace is circuit

is

con-

and Instrument

con- ing correctly. cuit.

con-

in

26.5- Trouble

Supply.

INTENSITY

normal

switch

and the

OR

fully

The

should

If

so,

operating

If

not,

un-

is

de-

Table

5-3.

is

delec-

R865

R868.

in

Ti

mePro-

is

opera!- Trouble

is

opera!- Trouble

y.

18

in-

,

IF

ABNORMAL

F60

1

or

Proceed

Volt

Power

Proceed

Table 5-3.

Proceed

2.

Proceed

3.

Trouble cuit.

Proceed

19

of

Table

Proceed

27

in

Tab

cuit.

Proceed

27

in

Table

SW601

to

check no.

is

in

Supply.

to step 4 of

to check

is

in

CRT

to step

5-3.

is

in

CRT

to

le

5-3.

is

in

CRT

to step

5-3.

prob-

250

step

-

no.

cir-

Cir-

G

r-

Table

5- 2, (continued)

PROBABLE

TROUBLE

6.

Sweep inoperative.

7.

Sweep operates but cannot be triggered or synchronized.

B.

Sweep cannot chronized posit switch.

9. Short sweep length. Time-Base

10.

Sta

horizontally on screen. Base Generator. signals

11. Incorrect sweep timing. Incorrect·

be

syn-

in

HF

SYNC

ion

of

F

UN

CTION

rt

of sweep shifts Holdoff

CAUSES

OF

TROUBLE

Trigger

and

Holdoff

Circuit.

Time-Bose

Gate.

Time-Bose

erator.

Single-Sweep

Switch.

X20

Amplifiers.

GE

l!:

SOURCE SW10. GAIN SW20.

Trigger T

off.

Corona

in Voltage Power Supply.

Lo

rge external

fields.

Ext

raneous

nals

due

to ground

loops.

Countdown Oscillator

050. FUNCTION switch

SW50.

Gate Bose horizontal lead

juslment. Time-Bose justment. Adjustment i Generator. Power Supply. culty.

. Time-

Generator.

deflection Width of the

disconnected. should be

Circuit.

Timing

+475-Volt

®

CHECK

1.

Set

PULSE

AMP

LI

TUDE

Ge

n-

trol

fully

and

check for opprox- Tobie imately gate D

19B

and

2.

Check

gate

at V244; proximately

TRIG-

1.

Attempt to trigger

switch

oscilloscope

switch

i

ng

a signal to the

eke-

EX

T

ER

N 125n

High-

oscilloscope trigger

sig-

f--------+------+-----

2.

Place FUNCTION switch ing

a test scope, trace the gering triggering

070. should not disappear at

any point.

With the switch and

no nal applied, that countdown cillator ating

at of approximately 30mc.

Check

CR

T

at

plate

limes

the sweep time men! of

per centimeter. Power Supply.

Time-

Disconnect triggering Trouble

the sweep. Maximum ceed to step

repetition rote of the

triggering circuit various sweep should mately as shown Table

2-2.

Ad-

1.

Check

should correct

- Proceed

01!:

SYNC

con-

clockwise Proceed

a

+30-volt

at junct

ion

of

D199.

for negative

the

plate

of Base Generator.

should

be

ap-

40 volts

by apply- takeoff

AL

TRIGGER

connector. The

should

properly.

at

P

ULSE.

Us-

oscillo-

tr

ig-

signal

through

channel

to

The signal

F

UNC

TION Check

at

H

.F.

SY

NC

check

is

oper-

a frequency

gate

of

V244.

gate

at

least 7 resistor

free

run

roles

approxi-

timing

ad-

diffi-

os-

10-

at

in

switch.

Trouble Time-Bose Generator. Base Check value

Bose

Table

Inst

ng

triggering sig-

050

width of

and

be

Maintenanc._Type

IF

NORMAL

to

2.

Trouble

is

ceed

to step 56 of erator.

Table 5-3. step 46 of

Che<:k

the trigger

and

The triggering chon- The point where the nel

is

normal.

FUNCTION

is

of timing to step 46

and

+475-Volt

is

in

Gene

rator.

5-3.

rument

is

correctly.

check

in

Time-

SWlO.

in

the Trouble is

adjust-

Time-

Pro-

56

opera!-

no.

Pro-

in to step

IF

ABNORMAL

Trouble

is

in

Trigger

ond

Holdoff Circuit.

to step

5-3.

Trouble

is

in

Time-Base

Gate

Proceed

T

able

Check

that trigger

amplifiers ore

correct-

ly

installed. Set GAIN

at

NORMAL

If

no.

2.

will

is

able

5-3.

in

Gate.

is

Circuit. Proceed

3B

to check

st

in

the

Proceed

in

proper ill

isolate

Ti

Table

Hold-

Tab

triggering is obtained interchange the two amplifiers. Then proceed to che<:k

triggering signal appears the trouble.

Trouble Countdown Oscillator . Proceed to step 37 of T

S-3.

Trouble off

5-3.

Proceed

2.

34 of

Gen-

me-

no.

w

S-3.

dis-

the

519

the

to

not

--1

le

Maintenance--Type

TROUBLE

sweeps.

near

li

12. Non

single sweeps

No

13. tainoble.

vertical

No

14.

form distortion.

Wave

15.

ibration-St

Cal

16. r do es not

oto properly.

17. Rate Generator

operate

not

519

PROBABLE

TROUBLE

OF

Time-Bose Generator. Proceed

Circuit.

- Holdoff

ob

oper

pr

Im

deflection.

Gener-

ep

opera

properly.

does

lo

lay.

de connection. ternol ottenuotor.

signal

Foully

input

oose

L ors. Improper

e matching

anc

les

ab

ternal c

nal sources.

tion missing

na

mi cess external cabling.

gna

Faulty si

Calibration-Step

te erator. of Table

rator.

Gene

Rate

CAUSES

triggering

ose input connections to

Faulty

source.

connect-

mp

i

of and CR

source.

l

CHECK

Check.

2. of + 475

age Power Suppl put should

between

able imately approximately volts.

Table

in Proceed

of Table

ck

e

Ch

1.

for 125 ohms

k.

Chec

ex-

measured

as

125

NAL

oscilloscope

Adjust internal triggering trou

the

from waveform.

scope should trig-

lo

and

ger should run.

Check.

2.

nections. Substitute external

Waveform shou ld

pear. Check.

ed-

ing

us

ex-

Step

sig-

for loose input

k.

Chec connectors,

T ter-

pedance

Ex-

that

and

tion for the in place. Proper waveform should pear.

eed

Proc

n-

Ge

Proceed of Table

output volt- Trouble is

+360

to

S-3.

to

3.

S-

delay

n

the sweep

input con- Trou ble

attenuato

for distortion

Calibration-

Generato

the

to step 68

S-3.

to 5-3.

Table

NORMAL

IF

the Troubl e

eck.

resis

ng

control

veform

wa

it

If

correctly.

ble

ep

we

s

k.

ec

Ch

1, R81,

08

7,

R8

d.

reele

oub

Tr

ed.

reel

value of t

tor

the

appears,

is

delay

R82,

and

has

le

in

R336.

to

on

operating

not,

If

in

C83, R85,

R88.

been

been cor-

im-

DELAY

screen. the

the the

circu

R83, R86,

cor-

Proceed

Table 5-3.

Pro

2.

in-

.

it

Check shorted Che Substitute put

Check lengths if causing a loss formance. si

gna

olt Time-Base Generator Volt Power Supp l

-V

- Ch

Out

y.

- i

ri

ve

be

rox-

app

and

+550

63

ep

st

step 43

ne Adjust

li

CRT.

SIG-

at

connector. strument

or

f

applied

e ascii-

Th

rs.

ap-

r.

im-

r

prope

matching,

termina-

is

CRT

ap-

74

step

5-2,

ABNORMAL

IF

is

to

d

cee

or

f

in

signal source.

ck

waveform.

external cable

to

excess

l source.

(continued]

+475-

in

17

tep

s

check.

open

put cables.

known in-

determi

ng is

li

cab

pe

of

k.

Chec

y. in

.

no

or

ne

r-

the

5-8

®

- 250-Volt Powe r Supply

I.

Check

-250-Volt

2.

Stop the swe at Should

3.

Connect autotransformer power when the

tween 105

4.

Check

5.

Check voltage drop across R610.

6.

Check 11

7.

Use the put adjust the contr outpu

8.

Check V6 me ¥646 ance chec

9.

Ch V627 sion), ¥646 checks

+

225-Volt

10

. Check

of

1

1.

Stop the sweep and check ripple put of the Should be approximately 3

12.

Connect autotransformer and check that power sup voltage volts.

STEP

for

250 vol ts

ot

Po

wer Supply.

ep

and check ripple

output of

-250

-Volt

be

appr

the

supply

li

and

volta

ge

voltage between terminal s 6 a nd

of

T

601.

-250¥

vol

tage.

t.

for the

27A

shorted,

nt

or

low

shorted.

ks

ec

k

f

or

the

A

ope

n (open filament or low

V624

open. Use volta

if necessary.

Po

wer

for

+225

the +

225-Volt

the

pl

y

remains

is

varied between

Power Supp ly.

oxim

at

ely 5 mv or

oscilloscope

to a variable

and

check that the

remains

ne

volta

ge

is

125

volts.

across ( 613.

control to set the out- Trouble

It

should

be

ol

for

exactly

following tube cond itions:

V624

open (open

emiss

ion)

V639

Use

voltage

if

necessa

ry.

following tube cond it

sho

rt

ed,

V639 ge

and resistance

Supply

± 5 volts

at

Power Supply.

+225-Volt Power

oscilloscope

to o variable

in

regulation when

105

®

TABLE

S-3,

the output of

volt

age

less.

in

regulation

' vari

ed

be-

possible to

-250

volts sweep timing.

fila-

open, or

and

resis

t-

ions

:

emi

s-

shorted,

or

the output Proceed

at

out-

Supply

mv

or

less.

line

and

12

5

CIRCUIT TROUBLESHOOTING

IF

NORMAL

Pro

ceed

to step

2.

Proceed

to

step 3.

Power

supply

is

oper

at

ing

correct

If

power supply output volt

wi

th

in

appro'Ximately

- 250

volts,

mare negative than

proceed th

an

-

225

Proceed

to

Check 0610, 0611, 0612,

Proc

eed

to

Check

ver

to

Proceed

to step

Power supply

25

volh

proceed to step 7.

-275

to

step

8.

If

less ne

proceed to step

step

6.

and 0613

st

ep

7.

is

appar

en

tly

11.

12.

is

operating

corrected.

norma

tical deflection factor and

step

I

Proceed

Check C613, C646,

ly.

Check

power-line waveform for

treme

flat-top

0610,

06

V627

,

R627

ag

e is

Proceed

of

If

volts,

gat

iv

e

9. If

voltage

R610

.

If

unusua

lly

supp

ly. loading. to step

6.

Check

T601.

If

output voltage varies b be set to correct va R646,

R647

5.

If

th

e output volt

che

ck

¥646, ¥639,

Be

certain 250-Volt Power Supply

is

ad

justed

proceed to step

Che

ck

C661, C662, C663,

Check

power line wavefo

lly

.

treme flat-top V627,

R677

0663.

Maintenanc&--Type

IF

ABNORMAL

to

step

4.

and

C647.

or

peaking.

11

,

0612

and

06

13

K602

is

norm

for cause

lu

R

648.

age

V624,

d

regulating.

13

.

or

pea

..-

-4.

lly

high, check

al, there

of

low,

proceed

ut

cannot

e, check

Recheck step

does not vary,

and

rm

for

ki

ng.

and

to step 6.

is

abnorma

R6

10

high load on the power

Check

If

voltage is

,

and

an

,

0660, 0661 , 0662,

Check Check

is extra

V639

V627

Th

C668.

Check

and

5

ex-

an

en

ex-

5-9

19

,

.

Maintenance-Type 519

STEP

13.

Check voltage across

C

663.

Check voltage drop across

14. R661.

15.

Check for the following tube conditions: V627B

shorted,

low

emission),

or voltage and resistance checks sary.

16.

Check for the following tube conditions: V627B

open (open filament or

sion),

V674 voltage sory.

+475Nolt

Power Supply

17.

Use

the same general troubleshooting procedure as for the Supply.

Oth

er

Low

-Voltage Power Supplies

18.

Use

the some general troubleshooting

procedure as for the +225-Volt

Supply. Always check supplies

order:

(1)

(

4) + 100

CRT

Circuit

19

. Check for

and

R855

being careful to ovoid contact with the

Switch

circuit. connections.

20.

Vary setting of the ond vory line voltoge between 125

volts while checking voltage

tion of

re

should

21.

Use

o high-voltoge probe ond o deal of core to measure the voltage the ungrounded side of age

should be approximately

22.

Check F

use

23.

Check to see ating

by

V812,

V822, should be opporent without removing the metal shield.

(661,

V674

open (open filament

or

V686

shorted,

or

and

, +450, +475, or

R854 main

seeing

V686

resistance checks if neces-

-250-Volt

-250,

(2)

-26.5,

-4

kv

at

the junct

(HIGH

VOLTAGE

off power while making

INTENSITY

and

R855.

in

regulation.

CS35. The

F801

and

R801.

if

oscillator, if

the filaments of

and

V832

shorted.

VSOO,

ore

5-10

IF

C662,

and

R660

ond Check 0660,

Use

if

neces-

low

emis-

open.

Use

Power

Po

wer

in

this

(3)

+225,

+650.

ion

of

R854

TEST

POINT)

control, Proceed

105

and

at

junc-

The voltoge

great

at

volt- probably o defective

20

kv.

is

oper- Proceed to step

V802,

lit

. T

his

NORMAL

If output voltage of the power sup- Proceed to step ply

is

near normal, check

R689.

If

output voltage

ably higher than normal, proceed

5.

If the output voltage

to step 1 is

much

lower than normal proceed

to step

16. 066

T601.

Proceed

The operating normally.

Proceed

1, 0662, 0663, and

to

step

20.

to

step

21.

high voltage power supply

to

step

23.

24

.

The trou

CRT

.

is

R688

consider·

ble

and

If

voltage

R660

and

normal, there

on

load for

cause of extra loading.

If

voltage

0662, 0663,

If

the voltage

to

step

22.

If the voltage

to

ceed

Proceed to step

is

Check

V802, V812, V822,

is

associated components.

Replace F

for

Check

at

T801.

Tab

le

5-3

, (conlinued)

IF

ABNORMAL

14.

is

abnormally high, check

R661.

If the resistors

is

on

unusually

the power supply. Check

is

low, check 0660, 0661,

and

T601.

is

near zero, proceed

is

not

near zero, pro-

step 25.

26

.

and their

801

or R801.

20-kc

oscillator waveform

5,

VSOO.

Check

VSOO

high

ore

or

Tabl

e

S-3,

(co

24.

Check

vol

voltage should

25. Use

R84

1 to adjust

R854

and

ment

should

26.

Check

that and 8856 I

NTE

NSI

TY

27. Perform

28.

Check voltages GE

OMETRY,

im

e

-Ba

se

Tr

ig

29.

Set

the

FUN

and

u

se junction of R Countdown Osci imately a present.

30.

Set the

FUNC

PU

L

SE

AMPLI

sho

rt

of

nect a triggering signal

TRI

GGER

GER

SOURCE

-EX

T. T

pear

at

the junction

3

1.

Check

that the triggering

ot

input to

32.

Check

th

at

ou

tput of

33.

Check

t

ha

at

junction

3

4.

Determine whether gered

by

collector

gering, a

should

a pp

35. Using a test whether 0 180 serving the w 0 180

is triggering, o pos

swing

should

tor.

®

nt

inued}

ST

EP

t

age

at

pl

ate

of

V832.

be more

th

an - 4

vol

tage

R855 to - 4

neon

ore

contro

step 1

and

ge r

C

test oscilloscope to check (

10

-

T

the free-running position.

1

25

he

triggering signal shou ld

Second X20

at

the trigger

Second

t the triggering sign

of

observing the waveform a t the

of

070. I

or

ea

r

av

at juncti

kv.

possible.

bulbs

8853, 8854, 8855, Check

lit

at

a

ll

settings

l.

T

be

9.

obta

ined from FOCUS, Check

ASTIGMA

TI

SM

and

Ho

ldoff

Circuit

TION

switch to H.

63

and

069) whether t

ll

ator

is

running. Approx-

to

30-mc signal should

TI

ON

switch

to

UDE

OR

SY

NC control just

to

the

!l

connect

or

and

switch

to

either + EXT.

of

R63

and

069.

signal

Am

plifier.

in

g sig na l a ppears

X20

Ampl

al

071

and

072

.

070

is being trig

If

the transistor

ge

pos

iti

ve-going swing

at

t

he

collector.

oscilloscope, check

is

be

in

g triggered

eform ot the collector.

be apparent

at

the

he

controls. Check

F.

PU

LSE

EX

T

ERNA

set

appears

if

ier.

a

ppea

is

to

by

iti

ve-going

collec-

T

kv

.

on

ad

just-

of

t

S

YN

and

Con-

T

I!:

I ap-

trig-

see ob-

hi

s

Check and

of T

he

components.

Proceed

C Proceed

at

he be

Proceed

L

G-

or

Proceed

rs

Proceed

If

IF

NORMAL

R856, R855,

8853, 8854, 8855, Check T801,

8856. trouble has been corrected.

V8

14,

V800

and

associ

to

step

28

.

CRT

tube socket connection.

the

CRT.

to step

30.

to

step

31

.

to

step 32.

to step 33.

to step 34.

to step 35.

to step

36

.

Main

te

nan

IF

ABNORMAL

V832,

C832,

If voltage

varies w

R84

1,

check resistance of

R842,

R841,

and

does not vary,

V8

148

ponents.

ated

Check

bulbs. bu

lb sho

Follow

19

and

Check control.

Proceed

Trace the triggering signal through the triggering where signal trouble.

Check 068, 069, R63, R66A.

Troub

by interchanging

signal

Check components between the put of

T7

0.

Check

panel. and ceed

Try

all

t

ro

l. 0 180 probably sistance locate the cause of the troubl 0180 ting of and

R840.

ch

eck

and

their

as

R855,

R856

The drop across

ul

d

be

from 55

information given for steps

2

1.

the circui t

of

to

step 37.

channel

signal

is

lost.

dis

appears

will

le

is

in

X20

Am

amplifiers.

th

rough

amplifier

Second

X20

the

READY

lamp

If

the

lamp

is

170.

If

the

lomp

to st

ep

38.

settings

of

t

If

an

y setting of

to trigger, the

in the

delay circuit.

checks

con be used to

does not trigger

R88,

check 0 180, 082, 170,

TlBO.

ce--

ith

sociated

and

the

Th

e

pli

Amplifier

on t

li

t,

is

he

DEL

at

Type

and

setting of

R844,

If

voltage

V81

4A

the neon

each

to

70

approp

to

po

int where

is

ola

te

R64

,

fi

er

. Verify

to detect

he

check

not

lit, pro-

AY

R88

causes

trouble

any

C833.

R843

neon

volts

ri

point

and

Trace

outond

fr

070

con-

e.

set-

5-11

and

ont

Re

519

ate

t

he

,

is

-

If

519

e

nance--Typ

te

Main

STEP

e approximately

for a positive

Check

36. volts

30

and

D198

37. Set the

Check for

DSO.

of

38. Set the

PULSE

the

counterclockwise. Set the

y

ll

fu

NGLE

SI Check conducting. measuring the drop across the plate resistors of

39. Rotate the

control

positive 7-

of

V114.

of Check

40.

positive pulse

plate voltage should

The + lOOvolts.

Check

41.

conducts,

Vll4

off lor

ut

c the setting of the When should rise

Check the voltage

42.

bose

he

T

that

time

in

rema depend SEC/CM

l, the voltage should

va tially.

ace

43. Pl at

switch TION switch AMPLITUDE counterclockwise.

The

tons.

Connect

44.

of

on

li positive pulse occurs a t time the

Check the collector voltage of

45.

should

It

26.5 volts Gate

Base

....

im

Check

46. pin 1 of

gat

at

amplitude

in

D199.

switch to

TION

FUNC

volt

-0.2

about

switch

FUNCTION

AMPLITUDE

switch

SWEEP

cut off

is

V114

that

fully

that Vl14 conducts

that

V134

there for o period

s on the setting

D160

for approximately

con

This

e two tubes.

th

AMPLITUDE

PULSE

clockwise. Check

10-volt pulses

to

is

cuts off each time that

V134

end

a period

NANOSEC/CM

cuts off,

approximately

to

should

070

of

completes a

070

Alter a def inite inte

switch.

NORMAL

the

SWEE

SINGLE

PULSE

at

OR

Press

lamp should light.

READY

oscilloscope

o test

D161

and

button

RESET

normally

Unblanking

and

.

V244

be

lied to the grid.

app

that Vl34 rem

wh

the

at

SYNC

is

be

the junction of operating correctly. oted compone

at

to

SYNC

OR

to

determined by

ich

plate vol

its

base

go

of

drop

INGLE

-S Set the

P.

and

control

the

and

is

th

pressed.

approximately SW168.

+3.7

5-12

NORMAL

IF

e-Bose Trigger

Tim

e

Th

L52.

and

DSO

Check

SYNC.

H.F.

cathode

the

Proceed to step 39

V123B.

Check

and

PULSE

ntrol necessary. sisters for the two tubes.

co

-

NORMAL NORMAL

is

V134

end

40.

step

to

oceed

Pr

SYNC

OR

for o series

pin 2

at

41.

step

h time o Proceed

eac

drop

varies with

switch.

volts

+75

of

positive eoch operating correctly.

cycle

time th

of

the NANO-

exponen-

SWEEP FUNC-

PUL

the

ESET

R

the

at

check that

int eoch

po

0 160. Check

it

Circu

volts

to

from

step 42.

to

Proceed

ns

ai

tage

The holdoff circuit apparently is

070. and

at

r-

operating norma

is

e reset circuit

Th ly.

SE

y

ll

fu

but-

june- Check 0160. Proceed

a

the bose ci

and

0160

.

47

step

to

Proceed

at

Check

is

Circuit

Check

-26.5-Volt

Check

if

Check D144. end

Check Check to be sure that positive plied to the grid cause the tube to conduct.

Check components.

Check

Proceed

l-

Check

t.

i

rcu

Check

IF

V184,

R56, R54,

V114, V134,

for - 0.3 v

Also check

T70.

Vl14

the

V123A

V143A

to

0160,

0238,

ABNORMAL

V194,

Power

and

gr

step 44.

step 45.

, (continu

S-3

Table

their ossoc

end

nts.

end

RSS

end

y.

Suppl

the grid re-

end

thode

ca

at

,

R78

070,

resistors.

ate

pl

its

id-to-cathode voltage

lses

pu

associ

its

and

ci

de

tho

ca

its

and

, SW160,

1!:164

C164,

1!:231.

and

,

1!:230

ated

rc

Rn

)

ed

i-

the

of

ap-

uit.

(continued)

,

5-3

Table

47. fully clockwise

trol

SINGLE

NANOSEC/CM

the

duration

he

t

V244

2 of

be

should

the

48. Set

check the length

and

pin 2 of

at

ing

be

should Check the waveform

49.

The waveform should

more than

of

approximately 9

NANOSEC/CM switch

Set the

50.

check that a series

appear

gates

for o series of negative-going Proceed

Check

1.

5

pulses (near

.

V264

of

waveform

Check

52.

waveform should going gates with a duration

180

mately

53. Check lor

at

gates

54. Adjust the oscilloscope far a free-running Proceed to step 55.

and

sweep,

1000. Check for positive

to

V214.

of

imately 9

approx

he

t

Check

55.

should

This

imately 9

ox

r

app proximately

Gene

se

e-Ba

Tim

Observe

56.

volts

+ 155 NANOSEC/CM

set

and

switch to

SWEEP

itch

sw

appearing

gale

the

of

duration of the

The

.

nanoseconds.

70

NANOSEC/CM

pin 8 of

the

of

The

V244.

approximately 9

at

a negative

be

volts with a duration

40

p.sec.

positive

of

pin 1 of

at

amplitude)

volts

160

pin 8

at

a series of pos

be

nsec.

o series of 180-nsec positive

. ponents.

V393B

NANOSEC/CM

set the

gate duration should

he

T

p.5ec.

at

waveform

a series of negat

be

duration

in

p.sec

in

110 volts

rator

failures in t

Certain

Consequent

V331.

of

and

screen-grid screen-grid voltage

ground, the

of

volt (measured from t

30-second

within the

above.

ON

I

CAUT

at the plate of

at

switch

-

NORMAL

the

Set

L.

NORMA

10. Check

to

at

gale

1000 Proceed

to

switch

appeor-

gate

duration

te

ga

p.sec.

V244.

pin 8 of

gate

of

and

20

to

or

pulses

V264.

pin 5

at

The

.

V274

of

ve-

iti

i-

approx

of

switch

pin 2

at

tes

ga

be

14. T

V2

pin 8 of

tes

ga

e

iv

ap

and

amplitude.

me-Bose Generator may cause

Ti

he

when troubles

ly,

control-grid voltages of

more than

is

nTient

.

tn

ins

of

end

he

periods.

for

Check

the

with

V331

2.

STEP

con-

SYNC

OR

AMPLITUDE

SE

L

PU

Set the

IF

to step

ed

Proce

step 49.

to

Time-Bose

he

T

operating correctly. cuitry.

step 51.

to

ed

oce

Pr

to step 52.

step 53.

to

Proceed

and

V283

Check

unblanking circuit

he

normally.

-

CAUTION

are

V331

t

vol

140

be

should not

ay

l

de

the time

to step 57.

Proceed

®

NORMAL

48

Gate

the associ

traced

should

and

s,

left on f

period).

.

t

Generator

is

to

he

or

Vol

at

the Ti be control-grid volt

more than

Check

th

and

ming.

ti 0197, properly.

Proceed

Check

is

Check

Check ponents.

the

If

C262 the gates ting of Procedure. R271.

Check

ed com-

R282. Check

no gate is present, check

lf

rating

ope

age

t

gale

he

t

23

V2

the screen grid

to

damage

Bose Generator, the

me-

checked immediately.

age

seconds

30

must

gs

in

ead

r

plate voltage

If

R336, + 475 R374,

near

is correct value

not corrected, proceed

Maintenance-Typ

ABNORMAL

IF

NANOSEC/CM

the

e coaxial

that

See

0198

and

to step

and

V244

and

R256

and

V264

do

gates

V274

and

incorrect, check

is

us

C262

Then check

and

V3938

L250.

abnormally

is

0220.

and

If

within 1

is

a time

at

mode

be

R334.

and

volts first

then check

volts try to adjust to

+ISS

wi

cables used

Vl84, Vl94,

0180,

ore

50.

the associ

R260.

the associated

appea

not

he

t

If

.

ing the

R280,

Iorge, check

the

zero, check

is

the plate

If

check the

V331.

R374.

th

to

switch

for

functioning

ated

r,

duration

the

librati

Ca

70

R2

1,

R28

V2

is

tting of

se

he

t

If

trouble is

If

step 59.

e

gate

com-

check

and

14.

V332

near

plate

5-13

519

c

set-

on

-

ir

of

If

,

Maintenance-Type

57.

Check of at

58.

Check is

59.

Check

tf

control-grid voltage should be

- 3.2 volts. is

be

60.

Check against the values

61.

Check should be higher than normal if the trol-grid voltage of

- 3.2

then normal

V331

62.

Free-run the sweep and check the ampli -

tude of the gate ative

63

. Set the

and sawtooth waveform of approximately vol

lOX

64.

Check more sawtooth waveform V424

65.

Check

more sawtooth waveform

of

66

.

Check

motely

¥424.

hove

of test probe.

67.

Check approximately

junction of

519

STEP

for

- 3.2 volts ot the control grid

V331

with the

2.

Jess

the plate voltage of

low, the control-grid

more than - 3.2 volts.

ts or more ot pin 3 of

V353

NANOSEC/CM

that screen-grid

then

the control-grid voltage of

the screen-grid voltage of

plate

volts.

is

more than

should drive the grid of

by

NANOSEC/CM

free

probe

for

.

for approximately a

.

for

150 Pin

low

for

vo

+ 1

40

volts.

V331

II

the plate voltage of

in

Tobie 5-l.

vo

lt

age

of

V394.

V331 The voltage should if

the contro

l-

-3.2

volts.

gate

ot the grid of V33l.

at

least

40

volts.

run

a linear sawtooth of opproxi- Proceed

amp

switch

the sweep.

on

the test

oscilloscope.

approximately a

at

volts at pi

ns

6 negative waveform may

li

tude due to capacitance

linear sawtooth waveform of

150

volts or more ot the correctly.

R440

and

R445,

R442

end

R446.

Calibration-Step Gene rator

68.

Set t

he

RANGE

switch

You

should hear the reed switch operat-

ing.

69.

Check

that the

by

observing the waveform

¥885.

The

.....e!'esent.

to

oscillator

normal waveform should be

5-14

switch

ltage of

V331

V331.

is

high, the less

than

V331

vol

t

age

should

V331

T

he

voltage

con-

is

le

ss

than

be

grid voltage of

V331

neg-

to

1000

Check

for

¥343.

Use

150-volt

at

pin 2 of

150-volt

pins

3 and 8

3 and 6 of

and

at

lOY

TO

1

25

is

opera

ti

at

pin 5 of

IF

NORMAL

Proceed

to step

58.

Circuit

is

operating correctly. Replace V33l.

The

Plate-Voltage Regulator

cling . Proceed

Circuit

should be operating correct-

ly.

Recheck

the setting of

Check ¥403. Check

less

Proceed

to

o

a

Proceed

Time

Check

step

to

step

to step

to

step

to step

-Base Generator

to step

l885

and

The

150

or

the

0 . Proceed

ng

to step

63.

64.

65.

66

.

67.

70.

R885.

61.

is

R396

operating

Use

R396

rect

level.

rected, proceed to step

oper-

Check ¥312, V374, ages against those indicated matic diagram.

Proceed

.

Check

and

C3

Check ¥343, ¥332,

Check

Check ¥424. plate leads

Check C435, C433,

Adjust the controls brate.

70.

If

Check

Table

5-3

IF

ABNORMAL

to

adjust voltage

If

trouble

cannot

V322,

and

V343.

Plate-Voltage

to step

61.

and

¥394.

D306,

D307

end R336.

and

See tho! deflection

are

connected properly.

D430,

D431,

and

C430.

FREQUENCY

to

see

if

the reed

it

does, proceed to step

and

V895A.

0318, 0328,

V363

in

V393A

D305,

12.

D344, D345,

¥353.

If

not, proceed to step V885

,

(continued)

to

cor-

be

cor

60.

Check volt-

Regula tor

on

the

sche-

and

D308,

C344.

R433, R435,

and

DR

will

69.

-

I

VE vi-

Table

5-3

,

(continued}

70. Check lion

FREQUENCY should vary between approximately and

71.

Display the output waveform of the brotion-Step Generator on the Type 519.

It

72.

Check

Type

able

73.

Check

step waveform on the Type 519 against porentl y operating correctly. ators for proper values. the settings of the and

ate Generato r

74. Set the the for approximately a waveform

75.

Connect

+ the Type 519 through a adopter. Check waveform. 7-10 the screen, in

76. Set the check. pears from the screen of the Type 519. control to the point where the

STEP

the frequency of

while varying the setti

II 00 cycles

control.

per second.

oscillator

opera- Proceed to step 71.

ng

of the

The frequency

250

Coli-

should be possible to obtain triggering.

the waveform displ

519.

There should be no appreci-

time or amplitude jitter.

ayed

on the Proceed to step 73

the amplitude of the displayed

POLARITY,

switch to

30-kc

V915B.

appearance

as

switch to

RANGE

XIOOO

and

30. Check switching

TSO/T125

of the

displayed on

10

nsec

OFF

and

VOLTS

controls.

MULTIPLIER

CYCLES/SEC

control to

at

3 of

the output waveform from the Proceed to step

RATE

500

connector to the input of

the

It

should be approximately

volts

in

amplitude,

and

approximately

duration.

MULTIPLIER

to see that the waveform disap- correctly. ni

If

Proceed to step 72.

Calibration-Step

Proceed to step

The

Rote

Generator

NORMAL

Generato

r

75

.

76.

is

operating The Avalanche

is

ap-

Maintenance--Type

IF

ABNORMAL

Check

the network

cuit of

V895A

of

If properly, work, charging and brat load

Check

If check to see MULTIPLIER trols run. used on ly tions. and tings of the controls. quency of operation check ate

If AVALANCHE cribed

If

check Q934

lector circuits. is severely distorted, check the emitter circuit.

erator adjustment cannot be made, check

R933

and

V885.

the sweep cannot be triggered

check the charging

voltage ottenuators ,

the reed switch.

ion-Step Generator has a de

(no

series capacitor).

the reed switch .

the charging voltage atten

the multivibratar

if

other settings of the

and

will

cause the multivibrotor to

If

so, check the components

in

the inoperative

If

not, check

components common to

R923,

R924,

C920

values.

no

pulses

are

present, adjust the

SET

in

the

Calibration

the trouble cannot be corrected,

and

its

If

the pulse amplitude

incorrect or

if

. Adjust the

just

stops free running.

,

R932

,

R931

stage

and

ng

in

the plate

the grid circuit

Be

sure

is

not operating,

CYCLES/SEC

V915

and

If

is

and

the

appropri-

control as

Procedure.

emitter

and

the waveform

0934

is

free

AVALANCHE

0934.

Cali-

con-

posi-

V895,

all set-

the

incorrect

des-

col-

and

r SET

gen-

If

519

cir-

net-

u-

fre-

is

un-

the

5-15

NOTES

TypeS19

®

INTRODUCTION

The

following

paragraphs

outline

the

calibrate the

should adjustments

ponents ore changed.

sirable from the

result sequently, any curing during calibration

troubles to a definite circuit or stage.

in instrument. Each required to m related ovoid unnecessary repetition of checks

Type

will

be

necessary when tubes

standpoint

im

proper calibration of

calibrat

ion checks

seque

nce for o

numbered

ake

one

checks

or

adjustments. T

519

Also,

checks will

that

check

not require frequent recolibrotion, b

Ap

parent troubles in the instrument are

of

troubleshooting procedure. Abnormal indications

In

the inst ructions

the

proper

procedvre

Oscilloscope.

a periodic recalibration

of preventive maintenance.

one

or

more circuits.

should

be

on

often

follow,

the

steps

comp

lete cal

step contains

or

adjustment he

steps

or

EQUIPMENT REQUIRED

The

following

equipment

or

its

210

with o

hove ot

T

ype

capable

210

output

and

o sensitivity

reduced

540-Series

capable

50

me

with o sensitivity of

to

bandpass

equivalent

of reading vo

250 volts .

voltage

250

vo

lt

s.

to

at

leost 50 millivolts

of

bandpass

ond

of

generating

sine waves, such os the

to

perform a complete calibration of the T

scope

.

1.

An

acc

u

rate

de

ohms

2. A nonloading de voltmeter such os John ovoiloble.

3.

An

from 1

4.

An

5.

An

t

ween

of 1 kva.

6. A test and

o maximum sensitivity of centimeter. Must volts such

as

Unit

is

7.

Time-mark markers Tektronix T

voltmeter

per

volt

or more .

accurate

ac

voltmeter

OS

to 125

or

from

ohmmeter.

autotransformer with

105

and

125

or

oscilloscope

also

per cen

ti

me

ter

a Tektron

ix

suitable.

generator

and

5,

10

,

and

ype

180A.

used

The

instrument

ut

occasional

and

other com-

occasionally

integral

aid

in

isolating

ore

arranged

ib

ration of

the

information

or

o series

ore

arranged

adjustments.

is

required

ype

519

Osc

Fluke

variable

Minimum rating

at

least 30

at

least

5 milli-

.

Oscilloscope

Type l

is

por

20,000

BOO,

lt

Pl

1

Con-

t of

illo-

ages

be-

per

ug-In

1-1-sec

to

de-

the

oc-

the

of to

if

me

SECTION

CALIBRATION

PROCEDURE

8.

A

1250,

1

KMC

1000

ohmmeter

bus of eoch

be

. Locotion s

th

e

inst<um

- 26.5

+100 + 225 volts +320

(u

nregulated)

+450 +475

+650

app

250 volts

14

INTENSITY

Timing

or

accurate

me.

adopters

PRELIMINARY

visual

to

make a check

power-supply

in

Fig. 6-1. The

roxim

ately

of

low-vollog

en

l ne <l<lhe

TABLE

LEAD

volts

vo

lts

volts

volts volts volts

control

ond

No.

017-019,

quency to

9.

Miscellaneous

10.

Miscellaneous alignment

Make a complete

use

an regulated test points shown should

Fig.

6-1 top

of

POWER SUPPLY

Set the

connect the power cord

Standard,

such

as

cab les. ls

and

ather

Tektronix

hand

source of sine waves with

ond

too

PROCEDURE

check of the instrument. Then

on

the res

is

tance

lead

to

ground

values

of

as

follows:

e

pow

CRT

.

6-1

I

RESISTANCE

I I I

I

I I I

ac

e r s

fully

voltmeter

resistance

upply

l

es

t

points

TO

GROUND

12k

20 20 3k

4k 4k

50

k

30

k

40

k

or

higher

counterclockwise

to the output of

tools.

at at

on

6-1

6

and

Port

fre-

the the

the

Calibration

Procedure--Type

the variable autotransformer. Set the ON

and adjust the autotransformer volts (or other voltage Allow

the instrument

proceeding with the calibration steps.

ADJUSTMENT

1.

Adjust

-250-volt

Connect the de voltmeter

sho

wn

in

Fig. 6-1.

volts.

2.

Check

the

Low-Voltage

Stop the sweep

PULSE

and the counterclockwise. of each of the low-voltage power supplies. Vary the output of the autotransformer between

250) over the entire range. Check volts with the NANOSEC / 105 the high gain plug-in the ripple voltage of each power supply . Voltages and ripple voltages should be approximately

POWER

•D

PULSE

volts while checking that the power supplies regulate

volts with the NANOSEC /

Befo

re

making Power Supply r

be

sure

the

Rote

tor

is

in th e

standby

in

other

than

SUPPLY

250

volts

26.5 volts

-1

4 volts

+

100

volts +

+

225

volts

+ 450 volts 450 + 475 volts

+ 650 volts

• p

ends

on

11H

1ng

519

POWER

for

on

for

which the instrument

to

warm up for several minutes before

Power Supply

to

Set the -

2SOV

Power

by

setting the FUNCTION

AMPLITUDE

Use

the de voltmeter to check the output

CM

unit

for

NOTE

Generator

position with

Single Occurrence.

TABLE

OUTPUT

VOLT

250

volts

26.5

+ 0.5 volts

14

+ 0.5 volts

100

+ 3 volts

+225

+ 5 volts

+10 volts

+400

to

550• 100mv

+6

50 +

25

of

NANOSEC/CM 1w1tch.

output of

PROCEDURE

the -

250

-volt test point

control

for

exactly

Supplies

OR

SYNC

105

and

125

for

proper regulation ot

switch set at

1000,

CM

switch set ot

the test oscilloscope, check

as

follows:

ipple

measurements,

is

OFF

and

the

Reed Drive

6-2

Rl

PPLE

{peak-to-peak

AGE

typical)

volts

50m'

switch

cont

(or

Calibre·

VOLT

3m' 5m' 3m' 3m' 2m'

lOmv

is

rol

210

2.

wired).

-250

fully

and

end ot

Using

AGE

----

to

117

fiSt. 6-3.

Location

of

the 400ICC

3. Set

Sweep

to

wise and the NANOSEC/CM swi probe of the test oscilloscope the point shown

2.5 p.sec between the gates displayed

125

scope. Check t the following dolo:

4.

clockwise and the NANOSEC/CM switch to de voltmeter to the center front ceramic strip with o screwdriver set the potentiometer maximum negative volts. T SYNC

Repetition Rate

Set

the

PULSE

AMPLITUDE

in

Fig. 6-2.

he

repetition rates of other ranges using

NANOSEC/CM SETIING I

5 5.5p.sec

10

20

SO

100

200 500

1000

Set

Position

of

PULSE

Set the

AMPLITUDE

on

control slowly clockwise

..

REP.

RATE

adjustm

ent,

1126A.

OR

SYNC

control

fully

to

2.

Connect the

line

(see

on

the test oscillo-

clock-

of

V331

ot

Fig.

6-3}

for

TABLE

Adjust

to

6-3

tch

the grid

R126A

A:~~~~~A~Aj~~E

11

p..sec

24 p.sec

60

p..sec

I

OOp.sec 200 p.sec 500 p.sec

AMPLITUDE

OR

SYNC Knob

OR

SYNC

control counter-

2.

R76

(located

Trigger chassis) and

for

o reading of

PULSE

AMPLITUDE

the sweep free

Connect a

on

runs,

then

the

OR

te

the Time-

urn

rminal of

Bose

the

until

fig. 6-2.

6-2

Location

of

the

V331

control-grid

tut

point

.

fig

.

Lo

collon

of

the

SWEEP

GATE

LENGTH

adjuotm•nt,

C262.

®I

bock the control off slightly. Adjust stops running. The dot knob should be just panel. to the proper position . Retighten the knob. The should now free run any time that the knob clockwise post the line.

5. Set Time-Bo se

Set the wise and connect the test oscilloscope to the grid line of V331, SEC/CM 9-

p.sec the duration of the the duration ing to the following table:

NANOSEC/ SETIING

1

------;50;,----

-----

6.

Check

Set the NANOSEC/CM switch to 10 and free run the

sweep.

~fV244

7. Check

Free oscilloscope to the + panel of the Type 519. The pulses displayed on the test oscilloscope should be approximately as

measured peak amplitude of approximately 4 noted.

8. Set Delayed

Set the NANOSEC/CM switch to 1000 sweep. DELAY of the test displayed amp

litude of approximately 9 to

@

above

If not, loosen the knob on the shaft

Gate

PULSE

AMPLITUDE

ot

the test point shown

switch to 1000

gates

displayed on the test oscilloscope. Measure

gate

of

the gates

500 I 4.5 200

00

1

20 10

,

---~-~~

Gate

and

Check lor the following

LOCATION

Plate

ofV214

Gr

id

line

of

V331

+Trigg

er

run

the sweep

at

the 50% voltage level,

+Gate

Check the amplitude

ED

+GA

TE

SOn

oscilloscope directly to the connector. The gates

on

the test oscilloscope should hove a peak

R76

until the

AMPLI

T line

TUDE

and

on

is

sweep OR

positioned

on

the

PULSE

the

RECURREN

Duration

OR

SYNC

control fully clock-

in

Fig

. 6-2. Set the

and

adjust C262 (see

at

the 50% voltage level. Check

at

the other sweep roles accord·

TABLE

6-4

(at

I

3D

-Megacycle Oscillo

I 1.8

I 900 nsec minimum I 450 nsec minimum

I 180 nsec minimum

I 70 nsec approximately

I

GA

TE

DURATION

50%

voltage

p.sec

minimum

p.sec

minimum

14

nsec approximately

Fig.

Unblonking Amplitudes

gate

amplitudes:

TABLE

6-5

I

AMPLITUDE

~~

I Approximately 110 volts

l

Pul

se

and

connect the probe

TRIGGER

connector by connecting the probe

~

-35voltsm

ini~

50

!1

connector on the front

50

nsec in duration

and

should hove a

volts when untermi-

and

free

of

the waveform

10

volts when untermi-

of

SYNC the front rotate

sweep

NANO

6-4)

lev

el)

scope

the test

run

at

Calibrati

on

Procedure--Type

noted, lolling off to approximately 50% of this

just

of

the

gate

(see Fig.

Connect the output

it

the external triggering connector of the test and

trigger the o scilloscope from this signal. Set the NANOSEC/CM switch to DEL

AYED control. Adjust C84 until +gate

-

lor

6-5).

of

+GA

TE

SOn connector while rotating the

35 nsec

in

time by means of the DELAY

the +

TRIGGER

10

. Observe the output

it

is possib

le

... -I:IH·I····I····I·

2

_d!C/CM

Fig.

6-S.

Typical D•

loy

• d

+Got

• oo

ocltlouope.

o

9.

Check Single-Sweep Operoton

Set the

NORMAL

SW

EEP

and

the

clockwise. Set the NANOSEC /CM switch to 1000. The

weep

s

pressed.

clockwise. button

ternal SING making connections to the plug, use only the tip connections. will

PULSE

should

run

once each time the

PULSE

AMPLITUDE

Set the

The RE

ADY

is

pressed, but the sweep should not run.

On

instruments with serial numbers

LE

SWEEP

If the shield is grounded, improper

result.

10. Set Grid Voltage of

Set the NANOSEC/CM switch to 2 Connect the de voltmeter to the grid tes t point and adjust the exactly

-3.

2 volts.

4CX250F

11. Set Plate Voltage of

the

Connect the de voltmeter to the plate of

the

plate strop of the tube. Ad j ly

+155

volts

at

the plate .

dioploy

-SI

NGLE

SWEEP

AMPLITUDE

OR

OR S

YNC

lamp should li

triggering jock was installed. When

V331

GRID

- 3.2

V331

ust

R374

(see

at

the

50

!1

connector to

oscilloscope

of DELAY

to move the

delayed

control.

···I····I

ed

on o 30mc t ..

switch to

SINGLE

SYNC

control fully

RESET

button

control fully counterght

when the

RESET

above

403, on ex-

and

operation

and

stop the sweep.

of

VOL

TS control lor

V331

at

Fig.

6-6)

for exact-

6-3

519

end

the

t

is

ring

V331

the

Calibration Procedure--Type

Fig.

6-6.

location

of

12.

Check

Calibration-Step

Voltage

Set the

VOLTS

10V

TO

1250.

charging network.

20.2

volts, using a nonlooding voltmeter. Set the

switch

to

1

V

TO

input

to

the cha be approximately 8.8 Set the

RANGE

switch to

13.

Adjust High

Turn

off the meter to the instrument (be sure the voltmeter

at

normal warmup period VOLTAGE voltage power supply regulates

or spot off the screen and able

250) supply remains power and disconnect t scope.

SIGNAL CRT 10 that appears on the tor). Adjust the one centimeter of

14,

terclockwise tion, spot appears on the TISM the the control clockwise around the spot. wise

oscilloscope

HV

least

4

kv).

control for - 4

down.

Then

autotransformer between

volts

and again check that the high

Apply Calibration

Input

connector and display the waveform on the

.

Set the

Calibrator

V

TO

125

0

Set

Maximum

With the

PULSE

and the

slowly rotate the

controls to bri

Max

Intensity {

INTENSITY

control

until

the halo

519

th

V331

PlATE

Generator

control to

10

Measure the de voltage

rgi

Turn

in

and the

The

voltage should be approx imately

50 0

and

again

ng

network.

volts,

using

STANDBY.

Voltage

power.

TEST

POINT

on t

he

oscilloscope

to

pass.

kv.

Check by

and

then adjusti

adjust the output voltage

105

regulation.

Switch

he

meter.

Step Generator

and turn

th

e helidial

CRT

facemosk {vertical deflection

HIGH

-

VOLTAGE

CRT

deflection.

Intensity

AMPLITUDE

OR

FUNCTION

INTENSITY

CRT.

Use

the

ng

the spot

R855

) control

full

y clockwise.

until

the spot

reappears

Then

turn the

just

disappears.

+

155

V

odjudm

l

l'll

,

Charging

RANGE

switch

at

the input to the

check

The

a nonloading voltmeter.

on

is

Then

first positioning the trace

and

Then

control

SYNC

switch

control

FOCUS

in

to

fully countercl ockwise

R855

RANGE

the voltage

voltage should now

Connect

the

de

the righ t side of the

capab

le of indicating and

allow

adjust the

to see that

th

ng

the intensity

from

the

125

(or

210

voltage

off the oscilloscope

turn

on

the

OUTPUT

to the

RANGE

switch

to

the some

voltage

(RB41)

far exactly

control

fu

lly

in

the

PULSE

until

a

low

intensity

and

ASTIGMA-

sharp

focus.

Slowly turn the

and a halo

contr

ol

cour.terclock-

15.

Adjust Axis Rotation

Free

run

the sweep

horizontal groticule

1000.

Adjust the

runs

parallel

16. Adjust Po

sition

the

GEOMETRY Position the trace to the bottom of the screen and the sett GEOMETRY

1374

.

ob

tained.

Make correct vertical deflection foetor ing with

to

17.

Set

Set the

at

the

sine waves the Type

on

the screen of the trol to obtain S

centimeters of the

linearity while the

volt-

Set

other sweep

the

HIGH

SWEEP

e high

1000

nsec/cm 1

up

vari-

500

nsec/cm

and

200

power

oscillo-

125

coun-

Rota

forms

nsec/cm

100

nsec/cm

20

nsec/cm

10nsec/cm

0

Connect

to

125

0

nect a 125-ohm cable

foe-

to the 1

fully

clockwise, and the takeoff for the Calibration the

in

strument. Set the the

DRIVE of the reed switch o stable display of the timing waveform the

oscilloscope.

posi-

start of the waveform from

the start of the sweep when the

is

set

to

te

and

With the timing waveform displa yed and the

R85

5

SEC

/CM cycles per centimeter over display. Set the trace to start approximately 1 cent

and

li

ne.

AXIS

to the horizontal graticule line.

Geometry

the trace

to

control

ing

of

th

e control.

control so tha t the best

final setting

sweep

timing adjustments.

Sweep

Timing

NANOSEC/CM

from

the time-mark generator to the input of

519.

Obtain a stable display of the sine waves

oscilloscope.

21j

cycles per centimeter over the righthand

2

50

nSEC

roles

RATE

INPUT

-p.s

ec

markers 5-mc

sine waves

5-mc

sine waves

10

mcsine waves

50-mc

sine waves

50

-mcsinewov

the I

KMC

connector

on

the front panel of the Type 519.

KMC

Timing

Standard. Set the

the

TRIGGER

POLARITY

switch to

and

FREQUENCY

and

Use

5.

swi

tc

h set to

NANOSEC/CM

position the trace near the center

Set the

NANOSEC/CM

ROTATION

control so

the t

op

of the screen

to

minimize bowing of the trace.

Moke

the final setting of

NOTE

of

high

voltage

switch to

Adjust the

di

sp

la

y. Adjust

control is

as

indicated

TABLE

6-6

SIGNAL CONTROL ADJUST time

1

500 200 100 20

es

10nSEC

Tim

i

ng

Standard to the

fro

m the

OUTPUT

SOURCE

+.

Be

-Ste

p Generator

RANGE

switch to

controls

adjust the triggering controls for

the

DELAY

so that

it

starts

5,

adjust the 5

th

e middle 4

switch

th

at

and

overall

geometry is

to

produce

before

proceed-

50

and apply

50

nSEC

C425

for

be

ing set.

in

Table

6-6.

p.S

EC

1 mar

nSEC

2

1j

cycles/em

2

nSEC

1 cycle/em

nSEC

I

cycle/em

nSEC

1 cycle/em 1 cycle/2cm

125

n

VARIABLE

switch to

sure that the trigger

is

installed

VARIABLE

for

stable operation

on

the screen of

control

to

pos

abo

ut 1 centimeter

NANOSEC/

CM

nSEC

control

centimeters of the

to

2,

pos

ime

ter to the le

switch the trace

connector

adjust

re

check

50-mc

con-

optimum

FOR

ke

r/em

SIGNAL

Con-

control

+C

.

Adjus

iti

on the

swi

NANO-

fo

ition ft

of the

to

th

e

AL

,

in

t

tch

r 5

the

®

groticule marks groticule waveform. Adjust the 2 meter over 6 centimeters.

18. Set Rate Gen

to the RANGE (33.3

control to between multivibrator waveforms).

Fig. forms).

19.

switch to X\000. Display the output of the rote generator

and

readjust the

DElAY

is

lined

up

mark

nSEC

erator

Connect the

lOX

CYCLES/SEC

Se

t the

Set the

Adjust

Set the

attenualor probe of the lest oscilloscope

3 of

V9158.

Set the

control to

control for a multivibrotor frequency of 30 cps

msec between waveforms).

MULTIPLIER

switch to X\000

3.

Set C920D (see

CYCLES/SEC

the

CYCLES

control to 30. Adjust

kc

(33.3

p.sec

Avalanche

/SE

C control to 30

6-7)

for 30

control so the first

with the first peak of the timing

control for 2 cycles

Frequency

MULTIPLIER

control to X\0

3.

Adjust the

and

Fig. 6-7)

for 3

between multivibrotor wove-

Generator

and

FREQUENCY

the

CYCLES/SEC

kc

C920E

the

MULTIPLIER

per

[333

centi-

Calibration

and

fig. 6-7.

Loce~tlon

of

tho

ICI!O

p.sec

C920D

and (920E

on the Type 519 by connecting the 50-ohm end of o

(see

T50

/TI25

adaptor connecting from the 125 n connector. Set the NANOSEC/CM switch to 100.

the

Set

AVALANCHE turn the control slowly generotor just stops free running decrease

in

the number of pulses displayed on the screen).

Generator

.

into the +RATE

TSO/T\25 odoptor to the

SET

control

counterclockwise

(as

50

fully

Procedure-Type

froqiHncy

adjustments

n connector

and

SIGNAL

clockwise

and

until

the ovala nche

indicated by a sudden

519

,

then

©

6-5

NOTES

Type

519

HB

HS

binding

binding head

ceramic composition

connector

cathode·roy

countersunk

double

end

diameter

division

electrolytic

electrolytic, metal cased

electrolytic, metal tubular

external

loc

us

and

flat

head brass

fl

at

head steel

lillister h fillister

head

or hexagonal hex

head

hex

head hex socket brass hex socket inside

diameter

BHB BHS

cop. capacitor

camp

CRT

"k

DE

dio

div

elect.

EMC EMT

"'

F&l FHB FHS

Fil

h height hex.

HHB HHS HSB HSS ID

incd incandescent

head

ead

intensity

high

brass

steel

PARTS

brass

steel

tube

brass steel

steel

LIST

ABBREVIATIONS

int

lg

met.

mig

OD OHB OHS PHB PHS

plstc:

PMC

poly prec

PT PTM

'"'

'"5

SE

SN

sw

TC THB

thk

THS

tub.

ww

hdw

or

5/N

internal

length

or

long

metal

mounting hardware

OIJiside

diam

ete

ova

l

head brass

oval

head steel pan head brass pan head steel plastic

paper,

metal

cased

polystyrene

precision

paper,

tubular

paper

or

plastic,

round head

brass

round head steel

single end

serial

nu

mber

switch temperature

compensated

truss

heed

brass thick truss

head

steel tubular var

i

able wide or width wire-wound

r

tubular, molded

PARTS

Replacement parts ore

Office

or

representative.

Changes

components

as

improvements developed in our engineering deportment. It ordering parts, to include t

type

or

number, serial

If

o

port

ix,

local Tekt ron in

part

number.

available

to

Tektronix instruments

they become available,

he

following

or

model number,

you hove

ordered

Inc.

Field Office

SPECIAL

XOOO

Part first

ORDERING

OOX

•ooo-0000-00

000-0000-00

Use

0 Screwdriver adjustment.

~

added

Part removed after this serial number

As

terisk preceding

or

for Tektronix,

Port number indicated

Control, adjustment

INFORMATION

from

or

through your local Tektronix,

are

sometimes

made

and

to give you the benefit of the latest circuit

information in your order: Part number, instrument

and

modification number if

has

been

repl

aced

or

representative will

NOTES

at

Inc

with a new or improved

contact

AND

SYMBOLS

this serial number

Tek

tronix Port Number ind i

.,

or reworked or checked components.

is

direct replacement.

or connector

Inc.

to

accommodate

is

therefore important, when

you concerning

applicable.

cates

manufactured by

improved

part,

any

Field

your

change

Va

lue

s

ore

fixed unless marked Variable.

Ckt.

No.

8128

8601 8606 8607

8853 8854 8855

8856

8857

8858

8870

Tolerance

±20%

C29

1

C32

C33'

C43' C44'

C46' C47'

C51 C69 C70

C72 C77 C77

C83 C84

C86 C1

00A,

B

,C C113 C123 C126

1

There are

two

®

Tek

tr

onix

Port

No.

Use

150-0027-00

1

50

-

0030-00 150-0001-00 150-000

1

150-0001-00

Use

150-0027-00

Use

150-0027-00

Use

150

-

0027-00

Use

150

-0027.00

150-0027.00

150-0036-00 150-0018-00

un

l

eSll

otherwise indicate

Use

283-0057-00

28

1

-0509-00

283

-

0026-00

283-0026-00

28

1

-05

1

8-00

283-0024-00 283-0010-00

281-0500-00

Use

283-0057-00 283-0028-00

283

-

0026-00

28

1-

0536-00 283-0114-00 28

1-

052

1

28

1

-0036-00

281-0524-00

Use

290-0089-00 28

1

-0.503 281-0517-00 281-0546-00

parts

of

this

description in your instrument.

SECTION

ELECTRICAL

-00

-

00

Serial/Model

Eff

101 820

X470

X988

10

910

X138

No.

Dis

c

819

Ca

d.

1

909

7

PARTS

Bu

lbs

Neon,

NE-2V

Incandescent

Incandescent Incandescent

Neon,

NE-23

Neon,

NE-23

Neon,

NE

Neon,

NE-23

Neon,

NE-23

Neon, AlD

Incandescent

pacito

rs

0.1

p.f

15pf

.

0.2p.f

0.2p.

f

47pf

0.1

p.f

O.OSp.f

2.2pf

0.

1

p.f

0.0022p.f Oiscap

0.2p.f 1000pf

0.0015p.f 56pf 3-12

pf,

150pf 3x20p.f 8pf 39p

f

330pf

NE-23

-23

Var

LIST

Descrip

#47

#47 #47

#12

Discap

c ..

Discop

c

Discop Discap 50v

c ..

Discap

Discap 25v

c ..

Discap

c ..

c .. c

El

ect.

c .. c .. c ..

Ready

Pilot

Graticule Graticule

ON

..

T

yp

e

519

ti

on

light

light light

200v 500v

25v 25v

500v

30v

500v 200v

50v

500v 200v 500v

500v 350v 500v 500v 500v

10%

±O.Spf

1

0%

10%

±0.5pf

10% 10%

7-1

El

ectrical

Ckt.

No.

C128 C1

31

C1

41

C142

C143

C144

Cl46 C151

C160 C164

C166 C168

C170 C172 Cl83 C

183

(187 Cl90 C196 C200A,B,C

C211

C2

13

C214

C214 C217 C217

C221

C222 C225

C226

C228

C229

C230 (231 C240A,B,C

C24

1

C243 C244 C244 C246 C256

C262

C280

C312

C318

C320

7-2

Pa

rts

Ust

- Type 5 19

Ca

pa

ci

to

rs

(ContJ

Use

Use Use

Tektronix

283-0004-00 283 28 283 281·0536-00

281-0543-00 281-0523-00 281-0523-00 283-0000-00 283-0000-00

283-0005-00 283-0024-00 283283 283 283-0001-00

283-0024-00 283-0002-00 283-0002-00 290-0089-00

283

283-0080-00 290-0020-00 290-02 283-0006-00 283

283283-00 285-0590-00 285-0590-00 283-0036-00

281-0510-00 290-0149-00

290-0002-00

290-0115-00

283.{)()()6-00

283

290-0020 290-0217 283-0006-00 281

281-0007-00 281-0518

*285-0672

283 283-0057-00

P

art

-00

06

1·0525-00

-

0518-00

0005-00

-00

24

-0028-00

·

0006-00

1

·00

26

001

13-

-

0080-00

-

0504-00

-00

57·

No.

7-00

3-00

-00

·00

-00

·

00

·00 00

00

Serial/Mode

Eff

X303

X403 X403

101

1225

X743 101

743

101 743

101 101

101 X743

X743

101

X743 101 743

l

No.

Di

sc

1224

742X 742X

742X

742

0.02p.f

0.02 47

0 330pf 1000pf

270pf

lOOpf

100pf

0.001

0.01

0.1

p.

0.01

0.1

p.

0.0022p.f

0.005p.f

O.l

p.

O.Ql

0.

01

3x20p.f

0.02p.f

0.

022

275

p.

250

p.

0.02p.f

0.2

p.f

O.DlJ.<f

0.01

0.22p.f

0.22

0.0025p.f

22

pf

5"f B

"f

3x20J.<f

0.02p.f

0.022p.f 275p.f 250

p.

0.02p.f 10pf

3-12pf, 47pf

0.1

p.f

0.1

p.f

0.1

p.

p.f pf

p.f p.f

J.<f

f

p.

f

f J.<f J.<f

p.f

f

p.f p.

f

Var

Deseription

Discap

D

isc

ap

c"

Mica M

ica

Mic

a Mica Mica

Discap Discap

D

isc

ap Discap Discap Discap Discap Discap

Discap Discap

Discap

Elect.

Discap

E

lect.

Elect

.

Discap

Di

scap

Discap

PTM PTM

Discap

Coc

Elect. 150v Elect

.

Elect.

Coc

Discap

Elect. Elect.

Discap

Coc

c" c"

PTM

D

isc

op

Discap

150v

600, 500'

500, 500,

500,

350, 350,

500, 500,

250,

30,

250,

30,

so,

500,

30,

500, 500,

350v

600,

25,

600,

"'

25,

1000, 1000' 1000

1

000,

6000,

500'

450,

350,

600,

25,

600,

"'

500,

500, 600, 200, 200,

10

%

10

%

10%

6'

'

6'

10%

@)!

Ck

t.

No. P

C332 C333A,B,C C334A C334A C334B

C3348

C336

C342A

C342B

(344

C346

C352A,B

C356

C357 C370

C380 C382 C385 C399 C422

C425

C430 C433 C43S C60

1

C602

C613

(634 C646

C647

C650

C655A,B"

(66

1

C662

(663

C680

C688

C698

C702

C703

C718 C728

2

Cover

Note:

®

not

Use

Use Use

Use

290-.0J42-00

290-0022-00 Use Use

290-0017-00 Use

290-0017-00

285-0511-00

Use Use

290-0077-00

285-05

285-0511

in

cluded.

Tektronix

art

290-0089-00 290-0115-00 283-0006-00 283-0022-00

283-0006-00

283-0022-00 283-0000-00

283-0013-00

283-0006-00

281-0529-00 283-0006-00

283-0022-00 283-0022-00 283-0002-00

281-0542-00 283-0006-00 283-0006-00 283-0004-00

283-0006-00

281-0007-00 283-0006-00 283-0006-00 283-0006-00 281-0559-00

28

1

-0559-00 290-0017-00 285-0515-00 285-0515-00 290-0006-00

290-0017-00

285-0510-00 285-0510-00 290-0077-00

1

5-00

No. E

-

00

For

cover order

Serial/Mode

ff

101

sao

101

sao

Tektronix

l

Capac

No.

Disc

Port

S79 S79

it

ors

No

(Cont)

3x20pJ 3x20p.f

0.02p.f

0.02,u.f

0.02p.f

0.02,u.f

0.001 O.Dlp.f O.Dlp.f

0.02p.f

1.5pf 2x0.02p.f

0.02p.f

0.

02

O.Dl

18pf

0.02}-!f

0.02p.f

0.021-!f

3-12pf,

0.02p.f

0.00151'f

0.0015}-!f 125}-!f

0.022}-!f

0.0221-!f 2x

15

4000

2x

lOOOp.f

125

}-!f 125}-!f 125}-!f

0.01

p.

O.Olp.f O.Olp.f 2x

100

2x

100

0.022}-!f

0.01

JLf

.

200-0093-00.

El

e

ctr

ical

Parts

list

-Type

519

Description

Ele

ct.

350v

350,

Elect.

60Q,

Discop Discap

1400•

60Q,

Discop

1400,

Discop Discap Discap Discap

Discap

Discap Discap Di

scop

D

iscop

Discap Discap

Discop

Elect.

PTM PTM

Elect.

Elect. Elect. Elect. Elect Elect.

PTM PTM

PTM Elect. Elect

PTM

Coc

C.c C.c

C

C.c

c.,

soo,

1000, 1000,

60Q,

5()0,

60Q,

1400v

.c

1400v

500•

soo,

600•

150v

600•

60Q,

600, 600,

5()0,

500v 450v 400v

400, 350,

so,

1S•

450•

.

450• 450•

600• 400' 400• 350,

.

250•

400• 600•

±0

.25pf

10%

p.f

p.

f

p.f

Vor

}-!f

"I

f

p.

f

p.

f

7-3

Eledr

ical Parts list-Type

Ck

t. No. Part No.

C743 C758 C760 C767

em

C80l C802 C803 C807 C808

C8

12 C822 C832 C832 C833

C833 C835 (841 C842 C857

C858 C862 C869

3

C883

C888

C895 C896 (916 (919 C920A,B,C

C920D C920E C930 C930 C938

Tektron ix Serial

Use

290-0010-00

Use

285-0010-00 290-0117-00 283-

Use

283-0057-00

290-0002 281-0556-00 283-0000-00 285-0511-00 285-0502-00

Use

283-0096-00

Use

283-0096-00

Use

*050-0223-00

283-0071-00

Use

*050-0223-00

283

283-0037-00

Use

283-0013-00

Use

283-0071-00 283

283 283-0033-00 283

285-0526

283-0509-00

283-0509

Use

290-0143-00 281-0549-00

*291-0031-00

281-0023 281-0012

281-0510-00

281-0508 281-0524-00

0024-00

-0071-00

-00

33-00

-00

21-

-0001

519

-00

Capacitors

(Coni}

/Mode

l No.

Elf

-00

101

101 59{) 101

59{)

00

X914

X482

101

-00

482 101

Di

sc

1001X

589 589

481

48

1X 150pf

2x2011f

0.022pf 50"1

0.1

~-tf

0.1

~-tf

'"I

500pl

0.001

~-t

O.Dl~-tf

0.001

~-tf

500pl 500pl

Replacement

0.0068~-tf

Replacement

0.0068 500pl

0.01

~-t

f

0.006811f

0.001

~-t

0.001

pf Discap

0.00

1

~-t

0.005

pf

0.001

~-t

0.1

~-tf

180pf Mica 180pf 20

pf E

68pl

0.1

X 0.

9-180

pf, Var

7-45

pf, 22pf 12

pf

f

~-t

f

01 X 0.001

Vor

Kit Kit

Des

Elect.

PTM

Elect. Discap Discap

E

lect

Coc

Discap

PTM PTM

Coc Coc

C

Coc Discop Discop

Coc D

isc

Di

scap Discap Discap

PTM

Mica

lect

Coc

~-tf

Mylar Timing

Mica

Coc Coc Coc Coc

cripti

on

. 450v

10,000v

20,000v 20,000v

oc

30,000v

ap

.

450' 400,

so,

30,

200,

500,

600,

1000,

sooo,

1000,

sooo,

6000,

sooo,

6000,

500, 500'

400'

500, 500,

500' 500'

Series

500, 500, 500,

10%

10'

10%

/,

5%

lf replacement

Use

Use *152-0075-00

is

050 050 068

069 1

070

3

7-4

*152-0203-00

152-0177-00 152-0026-00

52-0026-00

101 59{)

necessary, order Tektronix Part

No.

132-0055-00.

589

Diodes

Tunnel Tunn

0

6100

06

Ge

el

100 rmanium

Tek Spec 20MA TD253B

10MA

Tek

Spec

4pl

2pl

®!

Diod

es

(ContJ

Ckt.

No. Port N

D71 D72 D72 D73 D

BO

D81 152-0026-00

D82 Dl44 152-0026-00 Q6100 Dl

60

0 1

61

0180 *152-0185-00

Dl

97

01

98 152-0025-00 1N634

Dl

99

02

14

D

215

D220

0221 152-0150-00 02

26

0227 *152-0233-00

0305

305

D

0305

'

D

306

0306'

0307 0307 0307

' 0308 0308' 0

31

8

D344l

0345

D344 D345 D

384

043 1

l

D

430

0610 0611 06

12

0613

D

650

' Furnished as a unit.

Tektronix Serial/Mode

o.

Use

*152-0075-00

Use

*152-0075-00 *152-0185-00 *152-0185-00

152·0026-00

152-0026-00 Q6100

152-0008-00 Tl2G 152-0008-00 Tl2G

152-0025-00 Xl05

152-0025-00 *152-0233-00 *152-0233-00

152-0039-00 1

*153-0009-00

152-0150-00

*152-0233-00

152-0037-00

152-0038-00

*153-0010-00

152·0038.00

*153-

0010-0Q

152-0037-00

152-0038-00

*153-0010-00

1

52-0039-00

*153-0010-00

Use

*152-0075-00 Germanium Tek Spec

Use *153-0026-00 1

*153-0026-01 1

152-0005-00 T13G

*153-0004-00

152-0040-00

152-0036-00

Selected for total voltage dr

E

ff

101 967

Xl2lo

Xl

220

X743 X743

01

250 743 X743

X759 X759

101 235 250 101 250

101 235 250

X235

250

01

280

10

1

l No.

Disc D

Germanium

966

Germanium Silicon Replaceable by 1N4152 Silicon Replaceable by 1N4152 Q6100 Q6100

1224X

Silicon Replaceable by 1

1N634

Silicon Selected from 1 N3606

1

49

Silicon Selected from 1 N3606

24

9 Zener 1

742

Zener Zener 1N30378 Zener 1 N30378 Si

licon Selected from 1N3606

Silicon Selected from 1N3606

234

Zener

249

Zener Zener

249

Zener 1. Zener

234

Zener 1.

249

Zener 1. Zener 1.

249

Zener Zener 1.

Zener

1279

Zener Zener

Zener Zener 1.

1N2615 1N2615 1N2615 1N2615

476

of 500 to 550

1N1582C

v.

op

®l

Tek Tek

escr

Spec Spec

.5w llOv

1.5w

lw lw

1.5w

1.5w 5w 140v

1.5w

Sw 5w Sw

1.5w 5w

l.Sw

1.5w

lw

1.5w 5w

El

N41

ectrical Parts Ust-Type 519

iption

52

Selected

51

Selected Selected

Selected

v

5h

200v 140v

110v

~~:

~

1

20v

~~:

) Selected pair

Selected pair Checked pair

5% 5%

7-5

Electrical Parts List

Ckt. No. P

0650 0651 0651 0655 0655

0656 0656 0660 0661 0662

0663 0700 0

700 0701 0701

0702 0702 0703 0703 0740

740

0

0741

F601 F601

F606

F650 F651

F801

J1

70

-Type

Tektron

ar

t No. E

152-0088-00 152-0036-00 152-0088-00 152-0047-00 152-0066-00

152-0047-00 152-0066-00 152-0040-00 152-0040-00 152-0040-00

152-0040-00 152-0047-00 152-0066-00 152-0047-00

152-0066-00

152-0047-00 152-0066-00

52-0047-00

1 152-0066-00

152-0047

1

52-0066-00 152-0047-00 152-0066-00

159-0036-00 159-0028-00 1

59-0019-00

159-0014-00 159-0038-00 159-0027-00

131-0267-00

519

-00

Diodes (Coni}

ix

Serial

/Mode

l No.

477 101 477 101 870

101 870

101 870 101 870

101 870 101 870 101

870 101 870

X323

X403 X522

X403

ff

Disc

476 869

869

869 869

869 869 869

869

...

Jack

Silicon 1 N3209

1N1582

C

Silicon

1N3209 Silicon 1 N2862 Silicon

1N3194

Silicon 1 N2862 Silicon

1N3194 1N2615 1

N2615

1N

2615

1N2615 Silicon 1 N2862 Silicon

1N3194 Silicon 1 N2862 Silicon

1N3194

Silicon 1 N2862 Silicon

1N3194 Silicon 1 N2862 Silicon

1N3194 Silicon 1 N2862

Silicon

1N3194 Silicon

1N2862 Silicon

1N3194

7

Amp

3

AG

4

Amp

3

AG

1

Amp

3

AG

5

Amp

3

AG

IS

Amp

3

AG

0.25

Amp 3 AG Fost-Bio

3 conductor phone

(or

equal)

(or

equal)

(or

equa

(or

equal)

(or

equal)

(or

equal)

(or

equal)

(or

equal)

S!o-81o 11 Slo-Bio Slo-Bio

Fast-Bio

Fost-Bio

jack

Description

l)

7 V ope

234

V oper.

r.

50 & 60 50 & 60

cycle cycle

K601 K602 K603

7-6

Use

148-0006-00 148-0005-00 148-0020-00

Relays

Thermal, Time

32. 32v

Delay 26N045T

©

Ckt. No.

t:lO' t:l7'

l50

l

52

L

53

l184

L192

l1

93

Ll

9-4

l250

l251 l312 t:l36 l375

l860'

l885

LR936 LR936

Q34'

aM' a70 a70

a

160

Q180

Q214 Q215 Q238

Q318

a328

Q766A

a766B

Q767

am am am

a934 a934

~

T

here

8

F

ur

nished

are

Tektronix

Part

No.

*10

8-0170-00

•108-0215

-00

315-012

1-

00

•108-0182-00

•1

08-0182-00

•108-0216--00

•108-0129-00

•108-0217-00

•108-0218-00

...

, 08-0235-00

•t08-0219-00 1

08-0225-00

•t 08-0022-00

•t08-0222-00

• t

o8.om.oo

•1

08-0266-00

*119-0011-00

151-0027-00 151-0027-00

Use

151

-0107-00

•t5

1-0083-00

151-0015-00

Use

151-0107-00

•151-ooro-oo

•151-0108

-00

*151

-01

33

-00

Use

151

-0137-00

151-0044-00

Use

151-0137-00 151-

0007-00 151-0007-00 151

-0002-00

Use

151

-0137-00 151-0002-00 151-0102-00

Use

•oS0-0140

-00

*153-0523-00

two parts of this description in your instrument.

as a unit with

CRT

.

®

Serial/Model

Eff

X105

X162

101

482

10

1

910

10

1

910

X743 X74

3

10

1

400

101

482

No.

Disc

161X

Delay

909

402

481

Inductors

481

Une

Transistors

0.5p.h l.lp.h

Formed from the

0.3

p.h

0.3p.h

-4

Section Grid

3 section

Rotator

turns on 27

from

le

cted

from

lacement

Grid

0 Resistor

le

by

Kit

Checked

line

Lin

line

2N964

2N2501

2N3251

18p.h 18p.h 2 Section Pla te lin e 5 Section

0.05p.h

3 Section Plate

0.75mh,

88p.h

Beam

Reed Drive

0.06p.h

4

1250

2N700

2N967 Selected OC170

2N967 Selected from Replaceab Se 2N2148

2N705 2N2148 2N270 2N270 2N277

2N2148

2N277

MP504 Rep T ek Spec,

Description

leads

e

Eledrical

of

R50

Parts

Ust-Type

519

7-7

Electrical

Parts

Ust-Type

519

Resistors

T

ektron

ix

Ckt.

No

.

Resistors

ore

fixed, composition, ± 1

R6

R7

R8 R9 RlO

Rll R13 R14 R15 R16

R17 R18 R19 R21 R22

R2

R26 R27 R28

R30

R32

R33

R36

R37' R43'

R44' R45'

R47'

'"'

R50

R

51 R51 R53 R54 R55

R56 R57 R58

R60 R6

1 302-0685-00

'There

Use 302-0680-00 Use 302-0101-00

302-0220-00

301-0241-00

301 301-0241 301-0241-00 302-0100-00 301-0241-00

301-0241-00 2400 301-0241-00 301-0241-00 304-0820-00 301-0510-00

3

' 315-0181-00 1800

1 1 1

316-0820-00 301 301 315-0750-00

315-0271-00 315-0820-00

315-0122-00 315-0122-00 301-0242-00

315-0270-00 315-0272-00 301-0222-00 315-0470-00 315-0

315-0121-00 315-0181-00

315-01

315-0110-00

308-0067-00

31

6-0222-00 316-0223-00 302-0275-00

ore

two parts of this description

Serial/Model No.

Part

No.

Eff Disc

0"/o

unless otherwise indicated.

-0241-00

-00 2400

-0750-00

-0680-00

121

-00 1

10-00

101 590

in

589

your instrument.

7-8

680 l

OOn 220 220

2400

2400 2400

100

2400

820

51

n

820 750 680 750

2700

820

1.2k

1.

2k

2.4k

270

2.7k

2.2k

470

200

120

1

800

Selected

110 110

7500

2.

2k

22k

2.7meg

6.8meg

Description

y,w lflw

lj,w lflw lflw

1f2w lf2w 1f2w 1f2w Y2w

lf2w 1f2w

1

/2w

lw

Y2w

%w 1

/2w

v,w

lj4w

1

/4w

1j4w

1

/4w 1j4w lf4w lj,w

1

/4w

1j4w

lj,w 1

/4w 5%

1

/4w

0

1

/4

w

1

/4w 5%

{no

minol value)

1

/4w

1j4w

5w

ww

1

/4w

1

/4w lflw %w

5~.

5% 5% 5%

5%

5% 5% 5%

5%

5% 5% 5%

5~.

5% 5% 5% 5% 5%

5% 5% 5%

5%

5% 5%

5%

®!

Ckt. No.

R63 R64

R

66A

R66B

R67

R68

R70 Rll

R72

R75

R76

R77

R78 R78 R79

RBl

R82 R83 R84 R85 R86

R87 RBB RlOO

R101 R102

Rl13 Rl14 R116 R120

Rl22

R

12

4

Rl25

R126A R1268 R12

6C

R1

26D R126E R126F R128 R130

R131 R132 R134 R136 Rl37

®

Electrical

Parts

Ust-Type

519

Resi

s

to

rs

(ContJ

Tektro

ni

x

Se

rial/Model

Part No .

Eff

301-0224

-00

301

-

0182

311-0215-00 311-0018-00

301-0121-00 301-0241-00 301-0332-00 301

-

0561

302

-047

1-00

311-0480-00 301

-01

02-00

301

-

0681-00 302-0471 31

5-0220-00

302-0221

316-

0820-00 309-0159-00 316-0270-00 310-0115-00 309-0273

310-0132-00 31

1-

0021-00 302-0101-00 302-0101-00 302-0101-00

301-0302-00

301-0272-00 308-0

1

78-00 302-0470-00 305-0104-00

301

-

09

13301-0304 311-0078-00 30

1-

0154-00

301-0394-00

301-0105-00 301-0275-00 301-0565-00

302-0333-00

305-0622-00

302-0822-00 302-0101-00

305-0682-00 309-0036-00

309-0228

00

-

00

X910

101

-

00

910

X1220

-

00

X138

-

00

-00

-

00

l

No.

Di

sc

229k

l.

8k

500

k,

1

k,

Var

20k,

Var

1200 2400

3.3k

560n

4700

500

0,

lk

909

68

00

4700

220 2200

820 5k 27n 1

5k

8660

19.6k 30k,

Var

lOOn lOOn lOOn

3k

2.7k

15k 47n lOOk

9lk 300k

50k,

Var

lSOk 390k

1

meg

2.7

meg

5.6

meg

33k

6.2k

8.2 k lOOn

6.8k 18k

12.5k

Description

lj,w lj,w

Var

lj,w lj,w lflw lj,w

lj,w

Var

lj,w 1

/,w

lflw

v~

w

lflw

lf.w l(,w

Prec

lf.w

l w

Prec

1f2w

Prec

lw

Prec

1f2w lj, w 1

/2w

lj,w lj,w

8w

ww

lj,w

2w

lflw lflw

1

/,w

lj,w

lj,w lj,w lf2w lj,w

2w

1f2w lj,w

2w

P

rec

lf2w lj,w

Prec

5% 5%

5% 5% 5% 5%

5% 5%

5%

1%

1% 1%

1%

5% 5% 5%

5%

5% 5%

5% 5% 5%

5%

5% 1% 1%

7-9

Electrical Parts

Ckt. No. P

R142

Rl43

R144 R145

Rl46

R147 R149 Rl51

Rl54

R155

Rl56 Rl56

R\60 R161

Rl63 Rl64

R165

Rl66

R167

R\68 R169

R170 Rl71

R172 R181 R182

R183 R184

R1

85

R186

R1

87

R1

88

R190 R192

R194

R199 R2

10

R211

R214 R215 R216 R217

R218

R220 R221 R222 R223

Us

7-10

t-

Ty

pe

Tektronix

ert

301-0102-00 301-0562-00 301-0221-00 302-0471-00 302-0153-00

302

-

0153 301-0181-00 301

-

0221 301-0472-00 304-0683-00

301-0242-00 301-0392-00

302-0154-00 301-0473-00 302-0821-00 302-0334-00

302-0183-00 302-0103-00 302-0153-00 302-0471-00 302-0103-00

302-0153-00 302

-

0183-00

306-0471-00 301-0271-00

307

·0055-00

301-068 306-0331 302-0330-00 315-0101-00 305-010 301-0470-00

302-0221-00 301-022 301-022 30

1

-0101-00

302-0101

302-0100-00 302-0100-00 301-0471-00 302-0102-00

302-0270-00

302

-

0220-00 302-0473-00 316-0150-00

316-0

1

50-00

302-0100-00

51

9

Re

sisto

rs

{Cont]

Serial/Mode

l

No.

Eff

-

00

-

00

101

1220

X830

X403

X830

X403

1

-00

-

00

1

-00

1

-00

1

-00

-

00

X940 1

01

101 101

101 1

01

No.

D

isc

1219

742X

742X 742X

758X

742X

1k

5.6k 2200

4700

15k

1800 2200

4.7k

68k

2.4k

3.9k

150k 47

8200 330k

18k 10k 15k 4700 10k

15k 18k

4700

2700

3.90

6800 3300 330 1000 1000 470

2200 2200 2200

1000 1000

100 100

4700

lk

270

220 47k

150 150

100

Oqscription

%w 1f2w 1f2w lf2w lf2w

%w

1f2w

lj,w %w

1w

lj,w 1

/2w

1

k

/2w 1f2w 1f2w %w

%w lj,w

lf2w lf2w lf2w

'f2w 1

/2w 1

/2w 1f2w

lf2w

1

/2w

1

j.w

2w

lf2w

lf2w lj,w

lf2w lf2w lf2w

%w 1

/2w

lj,w lf2w

lf2w

1f2w 1f2w 1

/•w

v.w

1f2w

2w

5% 5%

5%

5% 5% 5%

5%

5% 5% 5%

5% 5%

5%

®

Ck

t. No. P

R224 R225 R226 R227 R228

R229

R229 R230 R230 R231

R234

R236

R237

R238 R238

R239 R240 R241

R242

R243

R243 R244 R246 R247 R250

R256 R257 R260

R263

""

R265

R270A

R270C

R270E

R270G

R270J R271 R2

72

R27

4

R27

5

R280

R28

1

R2B2

R284 R284

®i

302-0100-00 302-0471-00 302-0 302-0102-00 302

316-0470-00 301-0301 305-0563-00 308-0213-00 30

304-0124-00 304-0154-00 309-0014-00

Use

309-0015-00

315-0221-00 315-0100-00 302-0100-00

306-<)333-00

305-0

306-0273-00 30 302-0100-00 302-010 301-010

30 304-0124-00 302-0 301-0563-00 30

302-0101-00

30 30

301 301-016>00

301-0245-00 306-0104-00 31 308-0127-00 308-009

30 309-009 302

Use

306-0473-00 306-0473-00

T

ek

tronix

ar

t No.

1

01-00

-

0101-00

1

-0911-00

1

53-00

1

-0390-00 1

1

1-

0222-00

2

20-00

1-

0433-00

1

-{)204-00

1

-{)394-00

-0624-00

6-0470-00

1

-0203-00 1-

-

0470-00

Seri

Ef

1

01

1

01

101

-

00

743

101

743

101 101 101 230

X743 X743 101

X105

101 1

105 X743

-00

00

10 240

al/Model

f

1

Resistors

No.

Disc

742X

742

742X

m

742X

239

Electrical Parts

(ContJ

Descrip

100

470n

1000 lk 1000

470 3000 56k 25k

910n

120k

l

SOk

1

meg

1.5

meg

1.11

me

2200 100 1

00

33k

04

1

5k

27k 390

100 1000 1

000

2.2k 120k

220 56

k

43k

1

000 200k 390k 620

k

1.6

me

2.4

meg

lOOk 470

3.5k

2k

20k

120k

470

220k 47k

1f2w V,w

1f2w

V,w 1

/2w

lj4w lf2w

2w

7w

1

/2w

lw l w

V,w V,w

g

1f2w

v~

w

%w 1

/2w

2w 2w

2w

%w

1f1w

1f2w

1

/2w

%w

lw

%w lf2w lf2w

V,w

lf2w lf2w 1

/2w

g

lf2w

%w

2w

lj

4w

5w 5w

lf2w lf2w

lf2w

'hw

2w

ti

on

Selected

ww

Prec Prec Pr

ec

ww

Pr

ec

{nomina

(nominal

Us

t- T

yp

e

519

l

value)

5% 5% 5%

5%

1% 1% 1%

5%

value)

5%

5% 5%

5%

5% 5% 5%

5%

1%

5%

7-

11

El

ectrical

Ckt.

R285

R286

R287 R320 R321

R321

R331 R332

R333

R334

R336A R336A R336A R336C R336C

R336C

R3360

R336E R336E R336E

R336E R336F R336F R336 R336F

R336G

R336G R336G

R336G

R336J R336J

R336 R336L

R336M R336M

R336N

R336Q R336Q

R336S R336S

R337 R338

R340

R341 R342 R344 R347 R350

7-12

Pari$

List-Type

519

Re

si

stor

s

(Cont)

No.

F

L

Tektronix

316-0470-00 316-0470-00 304-0222-00 301-0681-00 303-0162-00

303

302-0100-00 308-0105-00 304-0562-00 307-0023-00

304-0100-00

*308-0193-00 *308-0214-00 *310-0579-00 *308-0194-00

*308..0215-00 *310-0 *

31

*3

10-0585-00

*310-0

*310-0590-01 *31 *31

*31

0-0590-00

*310-0

*31

0-0578-00

*31

0-0585-00

*310-0

*310-0590-01 *310 *31

0-0589-00

310-0122-00 310-0142-00 310-0122-00 310-0142-00

310-0122-00

310-0142-00

310-0123-00 310-0143-00 310-0097-00 310-0144-00 308-0065-00 308-0108-00

301..0101-00 301-0101-00

302-0101-00 309-0155-00 309-0155-00 316-056

Part

No.

-0132-00

579-00

0-0580-00

590-00

0-0580-00 0-0585-00

590-0

590-00

-058

1-00

1

-00

Se

rial/Model

Eff

101

1080

101 162 278 101 1

62

278 101 101 162 278

1225

101 162

278

1

1225

101 162 278

1225 101 278

101 278 101 278 10 278

10 278 1

01 278 101 101

No.

Disc

470 470

2.2k

6800

1079

1.6k

1.3k 100

30k

5.6k

4.70

1

61

100

277

1.8k

1.6k

161

6k

277

5k

4.5k

161X

6k 16k

161 277

20k

1224

18k

161

16k

277

20k

1224

18k 1

8k

161

17k

277

20k

1224

lBk lBk

277

46k 43k

182k

277

172k

277

182k

1

277

277 277

161X 161X

172k 182k 172k

453

432 900k 866k 2k 15k

lOOn 1

000 1000 40k 40k 5600

k k

Descr

1

/4w %w

lf2w

%w

25w 25w

20w

25w

5w

1

/2w lf2w 1

/2w Y2w lf2w v.w

iption

lw lw

lw

8w

ww

lw

l w

ww ww

3w

ww

ww ww

4w

ww

4w

ww

4w

ww

4w

ww ww

8w 4w

ww

4w

ww

4w

ww

8w

ww

4w

ww

4w

ww

4w

ww

8w

ww

4w

ww

4w

ww

lw

Pr

ec

lw

P

rec

lw

Prec

lw

Prec

l w

''

"'

lw

Prec

l w

''"'

lw

Prec

lw

Pr

ec

lw

Pr

ec

ww ww

Prec Prec

5% 5%

1%

1% 1% 1% 1%

1% 1% 1% 1% 1%

1% 1"/. 1%

1% 1% 1%

1%

1% 1% 1%

1% 1% 1% 1% 5% 5%

5% 5%

1% 1%

@l

Ckt. R35

R352

R352 R356 R356

R357 R357

R360

R361 R364

R370

R

371

R371

R372 R373

R374 R375 R380

R381

R383

R384

R385 R390

R393

R385

R396

R397 R398

R399 R400 R401 R406

R420

R421 R422 R425 R426 R426

R432 R433 R435 R440 R440

®!

Electrical Parts

Resisto

rs

(Cont)

T

ek

tronix

Se

rial/

Model

No.

1

316 304-0153 304-0103-00

304-0563-00

303-0513-00

304-0563..()1) 303-0513-00 316-0101-00 316-0101-00

308-0051-00

309-0056-00 301-0394-00 309-0052-00

Use

301-0204-00 301-0204-00

316-0101 301-0561 311-0078-00 302-0271-00 301-0910-00

301 301-0474 315-0682 302-0101-00 302-0102-00

306-0563-00

304-0 311-0005-00 301-0561-00 301-0562-00

302-0101..()1) 302-0105-00

302-068

306-0333-00 31

316305-0153-00

Use

303-0243-00

Use

305-0393-00 305-0393-00

302-0334 301-0105-00 301-0105-00 302-0226-00 302-0156..()1)

Part

No.

·0561-00

-

0203-00

1

05-00

5-00

6-0101-00

010

1-0

Elf

-

00

101

278

101

278

101

278

101 105 101 105 240

-

00

-

00

X105

-

00

-

00

0

101 105

-

00

101 137

No.

Disc

277 277

277

104

104 239

104

136

Description

5600 15k lOk 56k 51

k

56k 51

k

1

000 1000 4k

390k 390k

220k 220k 200k

1000 5600

50k, Var 2700

910

20k

470k

6.8k

1000 lk

56k

1

meg

soon,

5600

5.6k

1000 1m"'

6.8

me

33k lOOn

lOOn 15k 24k l w 39k 39k

330k

1

meg

1

meg

22

meg

15

meg

%w

lw

'/•w

'l•w

5w

lj,w Y,w '/,w lj,w lj,w

'/•w lj,w

0

.1

lj,w lj,w

lj,w lj,w lj4w lf2w lj,w

2w lw

Var

y,w lj,w

lj,w lj,w

g

'/,w

2w

'/•w

2w lw

2w

lj,w v,w lf,w lj,w lj,w

lw lw lw lw

lw

w

ww

Prec

Pre

c

Ust-Type

519

5%

1% 5%

5%

''"

5%

5% 5% 5%

5% 5%

5% 5% 5% 5%

5% 5%

7-13

El

ectrical Parts

Ck

t.

N

R441 R442 R442 R445 R446

R602 R603 R606 R610 R613

R620 R621 R623 R624 R625

R626 R627

R628

R633 R634

R641 R642 R644 R645 R646

R647 R648 R650 R65

1

R655

R660 R661 R662 R670 R67

1

R672 R673 R674

R677

R680

R681 R682

R683 R684 R685

7-14

Us

t-Typ

e

519

Resistors

(Coni}

o.

Tektronix Ser

311 302 302 302 302-0101

306-0180-00 311-0055-00 311-0055-00 304-0100 308-

306-

301

302

302-0102-00

Use

304-0123-00

306-

Use

308-0018-00

306-0101-00

306.0333·00 302

302-0224 304 302-0102-00 302·0224-00 309·0045·00

311 309-0090-00 308 308-0165-00 308-0179-00

306·01 306-0100-00 308-0027 302 302-0273-00

306-0184-00 302

302-0102-00 308-0017-00 302-0105-00

302 302-0104-00 302-0823-00

Use

301 302

Part

-

0152-00

-

0226-00

-

0156-00

-

0101-00

0027

0104-00

-

0204-00

-

0105

0223

-

0224-00

-

0823

-00

-0171-

-

0224

-

0105-00

-

0395

-0274-00

-

0102

15-00

00-00

No.

-

-00

-

ial/Mode

l

EH

101 137

-

00

-

00

.QO

-

00

-

00

X611

-00

-

00

X403

00 00

00

No.

Di

sc Description

2x500k, 22 15 lOOn 100n

18n 50 50

lDn 30k

lOOk 200k 1 meg lk 1

2k

22k

2.5k lOOn

33 k

220k

220k 82k l k 220k l

OOk

10k,

SOk o.5n o.5n 5n

10n

lOn 30k 22

0 k

27k

180k 1

meg lk 2k 1

meg

3.9 lOOk 82k 270k lk

n, n,

meg meg

meg

Var

V2w V2

w Y2w V2w

Var Var

Var

2w

lw

lOw

2w

%w V2 V2w

lw

2w

lOw

2w 2w

V2w

l w

y,w %W %w

%w

20w

5w 5w

2w

lOw

1

/2w

%w

2w

Y2

%w

lOw

V2

1f2w V2w V2w 1f2 lf2

w

136

ww ww

ww

Prec

ww

Prec

ww

ww ww

ww

1%

5% 5% 5%

5%

(j)

Ckt. N

R688

R68 R693

R694 R695

R697 R698 R698

R699

R700

R70

R702 R704 R710

R711 R712

R713

R714

R715

R717 R718

R719 R720 R721

R722 R723 R724 R725

R726

R727 R728 R729 R730 R731

R732A

R734 R735 R740 R741 R742

R743 R751 R752 R753

54

R7 R755

®

519

e

Prec Prec

ww

Prec Prec Prec Prec

ww ww

ww

Prec Prec

2nsec-l

Ust-Typ

Sec

f<

1% 1%

5%

1%

1~.

5%

51.

5% 1% 1%

5%

1%

.

11

Electrical Parts

(Coni)

Resistors

No.

Model

ial/

No.

Part

0-00

-0102-00 0102

1-0364-00

0-0064-00

0119-00

0684

-

-0151-00

0470-00

24 93

-03

0105-00

Ser

Eff

-00

101

-00

1060 10

060

1

-00

X57

X575

00

X575

-00

00

Disc

300k 330k

470k

1k 1k

4.5k lllk

1059

lllk

267k

1

1059

267k

100 100

30k 600 180k

27k

1 meg

1k 1k

12k

k

429 900k

330k

68k

k

360

470k

470

1k

5

1500

500

1

500k 1w

332k

680k

1500

Vor

1 meg,

470 470

k

220 220k

10n

120k

39k

k

150

I meg

1k 1k

es

D

1/,w 1

/zw 1/,w 1

/zw Vzw

20w

v,w Vzw

1!,w 1f2

2w 2w

lOw

Sw

1

/2w 1/,w

2w

1/,w 1/,w v,w

Bw

y,w

1w 2w

v,w

1

/2w 1/,w 1/,w

V2w

1w

1w 1w

Y,w

1w

v,w 1/,w

y,w

v,w %w

2w

1/,w

1w

y,w 1

/2w 1/,w

cription

w

o.

9

1

-J

Tektronix

309-0261-00 309-0101-00 302-0474 302-0102-00 302-0102-00

308-0033 309-0046 323-061

309-0276-00

323-0426-00

306-0100-00 306-0100 308-0027-00 308-0162-00 302-0184-00

302-0273-00 306-0334-00 330k 302-0105-00 302 302-

308-0093-00 309-0170-00 310-0097-00 306-0334-00 302-0683-00

30 302-0474 302-0470-00 302-0102 304-0151-00

304-0151.00 31 310-

302

304

(9)

311-0039-00 302302-0470-00 302-0224-00 302-0224-00 302-0100-00

306-01 302

304-0154-

302302-0102-00 302-0102-00

7-15

ectrical Parts

El

Ckt. No.

R758

R759

R760 R760

R761

R763

R763 R764 R765 R766

R767 R768

R769

R770

R771

R773

R777

R778

R780

R781

R783 R785

R801 R803

R803

804

R R804 R806

R807

R815

R834 R835 R840 R841

R842 R842 R843 R843 R844

R844 R845 R846 R847 R848 R849

7-16

Ust- Type 5

ektroni;~~

T

Part No .

0328

-

309

Use

0100-00

310-

Use

309-0200-00

0296-00

-

323

323-0385

Use

302-0682-00

-0

302 302-0332-

301.0101-00 0154

-

302

0535

•31 0308-0075-00

308.0075-00 308-0242-00 304-0104-00

0393

306306-0102 308-0184-00 308-0162-00

-01

302

0104

-

302 302-0104-00 302-0104-00

0391-00

-

304 306-0124

306-0104-00 306-0124-00 306-0104-00 302-0104-00 302-0152-00

302.0105-00

0474

-

302

0474

-

302

0185

-

304 311-0039

04

-

306

0275-00

306-

306-0475-00

306-0275-00 306-0475.00

306-0225

306-0225-00

306-0225-00 306-0225

0102

-

316

0156.00

-

306

272-00

54

75-

19

{Cont}

rs

Resisto

No.

l

ial/Mode

Ser

Eff

00

-

101

1240

-00

01

1 743

00 00

-

00

-

X403

10

743

00

-

00

-

00

-

10

-00

384

01

1 384

-00 00

00

-

01

1

00

522 10 522 10

522

00

-

522

X

X522 X5

00

X914

00

-

XI

Disc

287k

meg

1

11.76k

1239

11.8k

lOOk

k

6.8

742

2.7k

3.3k

lOOn 150k

In lOOn lOOn

0.2511

lOOk

1

1 1

22

58

742

383

521 521 521

39k

lk

7.5k

60n

150k

lOOk lOOk lOOk

390n

120k

OOk

l

120k

lOOk lOOk

1.5k

meg

1

470k

meg

.8

1 1 meg, Var

meg

4.7 meg

2.7 meg

4.7 meg

2.7

4.7 meg

meg

2.2 meg

2.2

lk

meg

15

Descriptio n

w

lfz

lw

1

w

f2 lf2w lf2w

1

f2w

w

V,

w

lfz

w

lfz

w

lfz

4w 3w 3w 5w lw

2w 2w

25w

5w

lfzw

2w

1f

zw

lf 1

/2w

l w 2w

2w 2w 2w

zw

lf 1

/zw

w

lf2

zw

lf

w

lfz

l w

2w 2w 2w 2w 2w

2w 2w 2w 2w

w

I~

'

2w

Prec Prec Prec Prec Prec

ec

Pr

ww ww ww

ww ww

!~

'

5%

'h%

1% 1%

1"/. 1%

5%

%

@

Ckt.

R

850

R850 R851 R851 R852

R852

R853 R853 R854 R854 R855

R855

R856 R

856

R857 R858 R859

R860

R861

R862 R863 R864

R865 R866 R867 R868 R868

R869

R870 R871 R872 R875

R876 R876

R878 R879

R882

R883

R885'

R886

R888

R890

R891 R

892A,

R893

R895

8

Furnished

©l

No.

Eledrical Parts

Resistors

(Coni)

Tektronix

306-0275-00 306-0225-00 306-0275-00 306-0225-00

306-0225-00

306-0155-00

311..0121-00 311-0121-01 306-0155-00

306-0105-00

302-0274-00

311..0126-00

311..0041-00 311-0041-02

316..0274-00

316..0105-00

316..0223-00

311-0141-00 31 302-0102...00 302-0102-00 311-0032-00

311-0032...00

302..0102-00 304

Use

301-0183-00 301-0183-00

302

309-0329-00

309-0330-00 309-0328-00 31

309-0331-00 309-0392-00

•

312-0016-00

31 319-0034-00 311-0237-00

308-0092-00

302

302-0152-00 302 311-0216-00

B

302-0474-00

as

a

unit

with

Part

No.

1

-0032-00

-

0124-00

-010

3-00

1

-0032-00

6-0473-00

-0

472-00

-

0274-00

SW885.

Serial/Model

Eff

101 158 101 158 101

158 101

1240

101 158 101

384 10

1

1240

1

01

225

101

1060

No.

Disc

1

1239

1059

157 1 157

239

157 383

224

Description

2.7

m

eg

2.2

meg

2.7

meg

57

2.2

meg

2.2

meg

1.5

meg 5 meg, 5 meg,

1.

5

meg 1

meg

270k

1

meg,

1

meg, 1 meg, 270k 1

meg

22k

2k,

Var

250k,

Vor

1k

lk

250k,

Var

250k,

Var

1k 120k 18k 18k

10k

2.87

meg

3

19

k

287k

250k, Var

20.2k 20k

Selected furnished 30k.

Vor

47k

125n 1

0k

,

Va

4.5k

4.7k

1.5k 270k 2x2

meg,

470k

Var Va

r

Va

r Var Var

w/R879

as

r

Var

2w 2w 2w 2w 2w

2w

2w 2w

lflw

lj~

w lj4w l

f.w

lflw

lf~w

v~w

1w

1f2w 1f2w

lflw

1f2w

v~w

lflw

to

28

k

a

unit.

V4w lj4w

5w

lf2w

1f2w 1f2w

lf2w lf2w

ww

Prec Prec Prec

Selected (

ww

Ust-Type

no

min

al

value)

519

5% 5%

1% 1% 1%

1%

7-17

Electrical

Parts

Ckt.

No. Part No.

R898 R910 R911 R913 R915

R916 R918 R918 R919 R919

R921 R921 R923 R923 R924

R924 R924

R925

R926 R928 R929 R930 R931

R931 R932 R932 R933 R934

R937 R937 R938 R939

List-Type

Tektronix

302

302-0470 301

-

*31

0-0503

302-0470

302-0102-00 302

-0564-00 306306-027 301

-0473-00

306-0473-00

304

-

311-0218 31

1-0039

311

-0

311-0329-00 31

1

-0326-00

309-0014 309-0017-00 309

-0016-00

302-0470-00 302-0223 305-0473 316-0332-00 311-0159-00

311

-0

302

-0103-00

302-0472-00 302

-

305-0273

315-0 315

-0

315

-012

315-0103-00

0563-00 0225

0124-00

4-

0334-00

159

329

0562-00

1

21-00

270

1

5

19

-00

-

00

-

00

-

00

-

00

-

00

-

00

-00

-

00

-

00

-00

-

00

-00

Serial/Model

E

ff

101 482 101 482

101 482 101 482 101

482

566

101 482

566

X482 10

1

482

101

482

X482

101 482 101

Resistors

No.

Disc

481

481 481 481

565 481

565

481

482X

{Cont}

56k 47n

2.2 25k 47n

1k 560k 120k 270k 47k

47k 330k 50k,

1

20k, Var

50k, 10k, 1 1

.5

1

.23

47n 22k 47k

3.3k 20k,

50k, Var 10k

4.7k

5.6k 27k

120k 27n 120k 10k

meg

meg,

meg

Var Var

meg

Var

Description

1

/2w V2w 1

/2w

8w

ww

%w

1

/2w %w

2w 2w

1

/2w

2w

Var

1w

V2w V2w 1f2w

V2w lf2w

2w

v

..

%w %w %w

2w

1f"w 1

/"w

V"w

'/"w

w

ww

Prec Prec Prec

Nominal Value

Var

5% 1%

5%

1% 1% 1%

5%

5% 5% 5% 5%

SW S

W1 SW20 SW20

swso

7

-18

10

0

Wired or Unwired

Wired

*262

-

0378

*260

-0359-00

Wired

*262-0377-00 *260-0358

Wired

*262-0376

Switch

es

-

00

-

00

-00

Rotary Rotary Rotary Rotary Rotary

T

RIGGER TRIGGER GAIN GAIN FUNCTION

SOURCE SOURCE

®1

Ckt.

No.

SW50 SW160 SW168 SW336 SW336

SW336

SW336 Wired SW336

SW601

SW601 SW606 SW870

Wired SW870 SW870

SW870 SW871

SW885

~

SW886

SW886 5W920 SW920

T4 T20 170

170

T1

60

T1

80

T

180

T

198

T

601

T602

T80

1

T88

5

T930

Wired

Use Use Use

Use Use

Wired

Use

Wired

or

*260-0357-00

Use

*260-0447-00 *260-0247-00 *050..0058-00 *260..0356-00

*050-00SB-00 *260-0385-00 *262-0500-00 *260-0385-00 *050-0194-00

*262-0611-00 *260-0361-00 *262-0611-00

*260-0578..00

Use

*050-0243-00

*262-0379-00 *260-0360-00

*660-0402·00 *120-0195-00

*120-0195-01 *120

*120 *120 *120-0193 *120..0186-00 *120..0200-00

*120-0188-00 *660-0403-00 *120-0325-00

Tektronix

Port

No.

Unwired

260-0506-00

136-0094...00

260-0449-00 311-0237-00

260-0693-00

276-0519-00

..0178-00

-01

94

-

0194-01

-00

-

00

Serial/Model

Elf

101 101

162

162 303 303

101

403

101 101

550

101

611

101

11

15

101

1115

X482

Switches

No.

Di

sc

161 161

302 302

402

549 549

610

Transfo

1114

1

114

(ContJ

Rotary Slide PushButton Rotary Rotary

Rotary Rotary Rotary Rotary Toggle

Toggle

Tini-Jax

Rotary Rotary Rotary

Rotary Slide SP Reed

Mercury Rotary Rotary

rm

e

rs

Tri Toroid Toroid Toroid, 3 Toro

Toro Toro Toroid

LV.

AC

High Tr Toroid 5T

DT

gger

igger

id

id id,

Power

Line

Voltage

Ta Co TD28

TD18

TD27

4 TD2

Ta

keoff re

turns,

6

Filte

keoff

TD109

r

Toro

Assy

.,

quodfilar

trifilor

id,

Assy

., short body

Electrical

Description

long

body

TD30

Parts

li

st

FUNCTION SWEEP

DIODE RESET NANOSEC/CM NANOSEC/CM

NA

NOSEC/CM NANOSEC/CM NANOSEC/CM NANOSEC/CM POWER

ON

POWER

ON

6.3V

CAMERA RANGE RANGE RANGE

RANGE POLARITY

REPLACEMEN

SINGLE

CLOSURE MULTIPLIER MUL

TI

PLIER

(Ferrite

Co

re

(Ferrite

Core

-Type

T K

IT

276-0517-

276..0517-00)

519

00)

TK602

~Furnished

as a

®

Use unit

260-0336-00

with

R885

Thermal Cutout

150"

.

7-19

Electrical

Ckt.

V1

14 V123 V134 V143

V184

V194

V214 V214 V223

V244

V264

V274 V283

V312 V322 V331 V332 V343

V353

V363

V374 V388

V393

V394 V403 V424 V624 V627

V639 V646 V674 V686 V694

V697 V717

V724 V737

V757

V800 V802

V812 V814 V822

7-20

No.

Parts

List-Type

Tektronill Serial/Model No.

Port

No.

1

54-0215-00 154-0187-00 154-0215-00 154

-

01

87-00

Use

154-0187-00

Use

154

-0187-00

Use

*050

-0258-00

154-0496-00

154-0187-00

Use

*

050-0258-00

154-0496-00 154-0022-00

154-0202-00 154-0187-00

154

-

0038

154-0038-00

154-0300-00 154-0301-00

154-0

187-00

154-0187-00 154-0187-00 154-0187-00 154

-

0047-00

154-0187-00

154-0040-00 154-0047-00 154-0187-00 154-0022-00 154-0056-00

154-0291-00 154-0043-00 154-0040-00 154-0043-00 154-0040-00

1

54-0056-00

154-0260-00 1

54-0040-00

154-0056-00 154-0260-00

154

-

0021-00 150-0005-01 150-0005-01 154-0041 150-0005-0

-

-00

519

00

Electron

Tubes

(Coni}

Eff

101 743 101

101 743

1

Di

sc

6688

6DJ8

6688

6DJ8 6DJ8

6DJ8

742

Replacement 12HG7

742X

6DJ8

Replacement K

742

12HG7 6AU6 6CW5/El86 6DJ8

12AL5 12Al5 4CX250F 6AF3 6DJ8

6DJ8 6DJ8 6DJ8 128Y7 6DJ8

12AU6 128Y7 6DJ8 6AU6

6080

OG3/85A2 12AX7 12AU6 12AX7 12AU6

6080

7734

12AU6

6080 7734

6AU5 1X28 1X28 12AU7 1X28

De

sc

ription

Kit

it

®

Ckt. No.

V832

0

V859'

V885 V895

V915

Tektronix

Port

No.

154-0051-00

*154-0308-00

154-0017-00

54-01

87-00

1 154-0187-00

Serial/Model

Eff

Electron

No.

Disc

Tubes

5642

T5191-11 6AQ5 6DJ8 6DJ8

CRT

Description

with shield

Electrical

Parts

List-Type

519

10

When ordering a replacement the front of the is

CRn.

1017 or above, order by Tektro

If

®

CRT

be sure to check the serial number of the

the

CRT

serial number

is

1016 or below, order replacement by Tektronix Part No. 154-0356-00.

nix

Port No. 154-0308-00.

CRT

in

your

instrument

{on

the bezel cover over

If

it

7-21

SECTION 8

PARTS

UST

PARTS

Replacement ports are available from or through your local Tektronix Field Office.

Changes to Tektronix instruments ore sometimes mode to

components

as

they become

developed

in

improvements

ordering ports, to include the following information

any

suffix, instrument type, serial number,

If

a

port

local Tektronix Field Office will contact you concerning

our engineering department.

you hove ordered has been replaced with a new or improved port, your

ABBREVIATIONS

a

or

amp

amperes

BHS

c

camp

'P'

"'

CSK

dio

div

EMC EM

T

...

f

F& FHS

Fil

HS

g

or

o.

GMV

h

ho.

H

HS

H

SS HV ID

incd in!

k or K

ko

l

G

Use

head

steel meg or M megohms or

binding carbon ceramic centimeter composition 0 cycles

per

second

cathode-ray

tube counter sunk p diameter division piv electrolytic, metal eleclroyltic, metal tubular external poly farad focus flat fillister gigo, germanium guaranteed henry hexagonal hex hex socket high inside incandescent internal kilohms kilocycle milli, megacycle

and

head

or

head

voltage

diameter

or

head

intensity

steel

9

10

minimum value

steel

or

kilo (l

lQ-l

cased

Ql)

SPECIAL

Part first

xooo ooox

·000-000

000-000

added Port removed after this serial number. Asterisk preceding Tektronix Port

or

reworked

or

Port

number indicated

screwdriver adjustment.

Internal Front-panel adjustment

AND

ORDERING

availab

le,

and

to give you the benefit of the latest circuit

and

AND

NOTES

at

checked components.

AND

this serial number.

Number

is

direct replacement.

or

connector.

DIAGRAMS

INFORMATION

accommodate

It

is

therefore important, when

in

your order: Port number including

modification number if

any

change

in

SYMBOLS

mm

mel. metal

"

OD OHS

PHS

plstc plastic

PMC

Prec

PT PTM RHS

'"

Si S/N

torT

TD

THS

tub. v

Voc

w/

wJo

ww

SYMBOLS

millimeter

micro, nona,

ohm

outside oval pico, or pan peak

paper, polystyrene precision paper paper round he root mean second silicon serial num !

era, toroid truss tubular

or

V volt

variab wall with without wire-wound

indicates manufactured by

improved

applicable.

port number.

6

mega

(1

0

)

6

or

10

"

or

10-~

diameter

head

steel

11

10

"

head

steel

inverse

voltage

metal

cased

tubular or plastic, tubular, molded

ad

steel

square

ber

11

or

10

head

steel

le

or

for Tektronix,

8-1

Parts

List-

Type

519

FRONT

&

REAR

8-2

®

F.

RE

.

NO

4

10

11 12

13

14

IS

16

~--~S~U~IA~L/

333-0611-00

101

-0065-00

331

101

337-0396-00 122-0721-00

426-0103-00 354-0110-00 354-0170-00 214-0166 211-

016.0040-00 210-0531-00

210-0527-00 214-0 200-0269-00

210-0013-00 210-0840-00 21

366-0113-00 213

175

131 132

132

1321 13213

132-0029-00

132-0030-00

1

1 132-0117-00 132 366-0113-00

213-0004 366-011

213

21 21021 210-0413-00

0009

49-00

1

0-0413-00

4-00

-000

-0117-00

-0007-00 0001

-

2-00

-000

7-00

000

32-0026-00

15

01

2-0028-00

32-0116-00 32-0032-00

-0119-00

34-00

-000

2-00

1

0-00

0207-00

0-0840-00

01

1

101

583

-00

790

-00

101 431

-00

101

1

43 101 431 X431

-00 00

AR

RE

&

NT

FRO

~

789 789 789

582

430

430 430

~

Y.

C.

S

OI

fro

PANEL,

LE

CU

TI

GRA

groticule masking

ELD,

I

SH

,

ASSEMBLY

incl

t

moun

NG

I

CAST

li

RING,

li

RING,

, strike

ATCH

l

SCREW, ASSEMBLY, mounting hardw

, camera

NUT

, crt, shield retaining

NUT

graticule cover securing

,

BOLT

pot

COVER,

T

PO

7

mounting hardware for LOCKWASHER WASHER,

hex,

NUT,

, small.

KNOB

knob includes: SCREW,

coaxial, plus

CABLE,

e assembly

bl

ca CONNECTOR

, coupling

NUT

E, conductor, outer

EEV

SL

snap

,

RING

TION, outer

RANSI

T

TRANSIT

INSULATOR CONDUCTOR

TI

RANSI

T

TI

TRANSI

LE

FERRU FERRULE

teflon

DISC,

, sma

KNOB

knob includes: ·

, set,

REW

SC

small

KNOB,

knob includes:

, set,

SCREW

POT

mounting hardware LOCKWAS

solder,

LUG, WASHER,

hex,

NUT,

gh ght

MO~O~<L~N~O~.~

T

rts

Pa

TION

IP

DESCI

nt

plexigloss

,

ra mount

me

ca

udes:

seal

t

seal

1

OHS

h

inc

/

x

4-40

4

camera mounting adopter (see ref. 5, 6,

included w/assembly)

t

no

e: {

ar

24

%-

,

mount

each:

3

/

internal,

,

inc

'/

x

.390 ID

14

h

inc

1f

x

-32

"%

2

FOCUS

l-

charcoa

3

in

~

/

set, 6-32 x

1

e,

gat

es:

includ

cable end, w

,

outer

,

ON

I

ner

in

,

er

inn

,

ON

inner

ON,

IN

l-

oa

rc

a

ch

ll

3

in

/

6-32x

14

rcoal-AS

cha

3

inc

/-.

6-32x

each:

for

3

/

internal,

ER,

H

ch

in

'3f

1

inch

u,

'/

x

ID

.390

inch

%

x

-32

:y,

ref.

ee

{s

phillips

1j

x

2

not

(

1

1f

x

1

OD

h

HSS

ch

mb

se

as

/ha

TENSITY

HS

ch

GMATISM

TI

HSS

h

(not

1f

x

2

1

OD

inc

~

S

inch

5,

h

cluded

in

inch

ly rdwore

included

7)

6,

w/pot

w/pat

ype 5 19

-T

st

li

7)

)

@

8-3

Pari

REf

NO

l7

18

19

20

21 22

23

24 25

26

tt

l.ist-Type

.

385-0041-00 211-0538-00

213-0068-00 366-0113

213-0004-00 210-0202-00

210-0407-00

175-0116-00 13

1 132 132-0002-00 132-0007-00 132-0026-00 132-0115-00 132-0028-00 132-0029-00 132 132-0116-00 132-0032-00 132

132-0119-00 132-0040-00

211-0038-00

175-0115-00 131-0007-00

132

132-0002-00 132-0007-00 132-00 132-0121-00 132-0026·00 132-0115-00 132-0028-00 132-0029-00 132-0030-00 132-0116-00 132-0032-00 132-0117-00 132-0119-00

-0007-00

-0001-00

-

0030

-

0117-00

0001-00

16-00

519

SERIAL/ MODEL

101

225

-

00

101 431

-

00

101 431 101 431 X43

1

10

1

431

101

431

101 431

101 431 X431

FRONT

&

REAR

{Cont'd)

Q

NO

.

T Y.

ROD,

nylon

mounting

hardware:

(not

in

cluded

224

430

430 430

SCREW, SCREW, KNOB,

knob SCREW,

LUG,

solder,

mounting hardware:

NUT,

hex,

CABlE,

cable assembly includes: CONNECTOR,

:·

NUT, SLEEVE, RING,

:

TRANSI

:

TRANSITION,

I

NSULATOR

:

CONDUCTOR, TRANSITION, H1ANSITION, FERRUlE

FERRU

DISC, ADAPTER, mounting hardware

4

SCREW,

CABLE,

cable assembly

CONNECTOR,

i

NUT,

SlEEVE,

:

RING,

NUT,

:

NUT,

TRANSITION,

:

TRANSITION,

IN

SUlATOR CONDUCTOR, TRANSITION, TRANSI FERRUlE FERRUlE DISC,

6-32

x

~/u,

inch,

thread cutting,

small

charcoal-SCAlE lllUM.

includes:

set, 6-32x

SE

#6

1

6-32x

/

~

coaxial,

plus

cable end, w/hardware

coupling

conductor, outer

snap

T

ION,

outer outer

inner inner inner

lE

teflon

panel

4-40

x

5fu,

inch

coaxial,

rate generator output, assembly

in

cable end, w/hardware

coupling

conductor, outer

snap retaining retaining

outer outer

inn

inne

T

ION,

inner

teflon

100°

6-32

3

/

inch

16

(not

included w/lug)

inch

gate

for

each: FHS

cludes

:

er r

w/rod)

csk,

FHS

x

~/

inch

16

HSS

delay, assembly

[not

included w/adapter)

phillips

FHS

phillips

8-4

©

REF.

NO.

27

28 29

30

31

32 33

34

35

36

37

38

366-0113-00 213-0004-00

331-0022-00 331-0085-00 132-0041-00

211-0011-00

366

-0113-00

213.()()()4.00 358-0010

-00

210-0013

-00

210-0429

-00

378-0513

-00

366-0113-00 213-0004-00

366-0117-00 213-0004-

262-0378-00 260-0359-00 210-0013-00

210-0413-00 210-0801-00 210-0004-00 210-0406

-00

366-0117-00 213-0004-00

262-0380

-00 101

260-0361-00 262-061

1-00

260-0578

-00

210-0013-00 210-0413-00

Parts

list-Type

SERlA

l{MODEl NO.

101 403

FRONT & REAR

402

00

549

101

550

549

550

(Cont'd}

Q

T

T.

KNOB,

small

chorcoa1-VARIABLE

knob

includes:

SCREW,

set, DIA DIAL, ADAPTER, mounting hardware lor each:

4

SCREW,

KNOB, sma

BUSHING, mounting hordwore: LOCKWASHER, NUT,

JEWEL, KNOB,

KNOB,

SWITCH,

mounting ha rdware: LOCKWASHER, NUT, WASHER, LOCKWASHER, NUT,

KNOB,

SWITCH,

LOCKWASHER, NUT, hex,

6-32x

L

w/brake and charcoal knob-VOLTS

panel

4-40 x V

16

ll charcoal-

knob

includes·

SCREW,

set, 6-32x

3fa-

32x

internal,

hex,

bushing,

ligh

t, green

small

charcoal-

knob

includes:

SCREW,

set, 6-32x

large charcoal-

knob

includes:

SCREW,

set,

6-32xlj

wired-

includes:

unwired-

hex, %-32

9

5Sx

hex,

4-40x

Iorge charcoalincludes:

set,

wired-

includes·

unwired-RANGE

wired-

includes:

unwired-RANGE

%·32x

TRIGGER

internal, % x

x

/n

internal, #4

lj,

6-32

RANGE

RANGE (see

internal,

switch SWITCH,

knob SCREW,

switch SWITCH,

switch SWITCH, mounting hardware:

3

/

inch

16

inch

BHS

FREQUENCY

3

inch

/

16

'/

inch

16

{not

included w/bushing)

lfa

lfa-32x

DRIVE

3

/

inch

16

TRIGGER

inch

16

SOURCE

TRIGGER

(not

included w/switch)

1

/2

inch

inc

h inch

6

RANGE

x

lj

inch

16

(see

[not

3fa

1

/,

inch

HSS

(not

included

HSS

11

x

/

inch

16

1f2 x 11/16

inches

HSS

SOURCE

HSS

SOURCE

11

/

inch

16

HSS

ref.

#38)

ref

. #

38)

included w/switch)

11

x

/

inch

16

w/adopter)

519

®

8-5

Pa

ltff

NO

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

rt

s Lis

.

366-0117-00 213-0004

262-0379-00 260-0360-00

179-0486-00 210-0013-00

210-0840-00 210-0413-00

366-0113-00 213-0004-00

262-0376-00 260-0357-00

179-0483-00 210-0013-00

210-0840-00 210-0413-00 210-0801-00 210-0004-00 210

366-0117-00 213-0004-00

t-

Typ

e 51 9

SE

RIAL/

-

00

-

040

6-

00

FRONT

&

RE

AR

(Canfd)

MOD

EL

0

NO

.

T

Y.

KNOB,

large charcoalknob includes: SC

R

EW,

SWITCH,

switch SWITCH, CABLE

mounting hardware: LOCKWASHER, WASHER, NUT,

hex,

KNOB,

small

knob

includes:

SCREW,

SWI

TCH,

swi

t

ch SWITCH, CAB

LE mounting hardware: LOCKWASHER, WASHER, NUT,

hex,

WASHE

R, 5Sx LOCKWASHER, NUT,

hex,

KNOB,

Iorge charcoa l-CYCLES/SEC

knob

includes:

SCREW,

KNOB,

large charcoal-

knob

includes:

SCREW,

set 6-32x

wired-MU

includes:

unwired-

HARNESS,

internal,

.390

ID

"3fa-32x%

charcoal-

se

t,

6-

wired-

includes:

unwired-

HARNESS,

in

.390

10

%-32

9

/

32

internal,

4-4

0x

set,

6-32

set,

6-

3

/

16

LTIP

MULTIPLIER

multiplier

(n

ot

9

x

/

16

inch

32x3j

16

FUNCTION

FUNCTION function (not

ternal,

9

x

/

16

1

x

/

inch

2

inch

3j

i

nch

16

3

x

/

16

32xl

j

16

MU

LT

IPLIER

inch

HSS

LI

ER

(see

switch

included

11

3fa

x

/

inch

OD

FUNCTION

inch

HSS

(see

switch included 3faxl

lf

inch

00

#4

inch

HSS

GAIN

inch

HSS

16

u,

ref.

#41)

w/switch)

inch

ref.

#44)

w/switch)

inch

8-6

@

REF

.

NO

.

48

49

50

51

52

53

54

55

56

57

58

59

262-0377-00

260-0358-00 406-0626-00

211-0008-00 210-0004-00 210-0406-00

131-0159-00

211

-

0061 210-0004-00 21

0-0406-00

210-0013-00 210-0413-00 210-0801-00 21

0-0004-00

210-0406

366-0113-00

213-0004-00 366-0117-00

213-0004-00 358-0010-00

219-0013-00 210-0429-00 210-0012-00 210-0207-00

260-0212-00 260-0447-00

210-0406-00

366-0115-00

213-0004-00

Parts

list-Type

FRONT

&

REAR

!Cont'd}

SERIAL/MODEL

-00

101 403

402

Q

NO

.

'

'·

SWITCH,

wired- GAIN (see ref.

swi

tch

includes: SWITCH, BRACKET, mounting SCREW, lOCKWASHER, NUT,

hex,

CONNECTOR, mounting SCREW, lOCKWASHER, NUT,

hex, 4-40

mounting

ha lOCKWASHER, NUT,

hex,

WASHER,

55 x lOCKWASHER, internal, NUT, hex,

KNOB, small charcoal-

knob includes: SCREW,

KNOB,

large knob includes: SCREW,

KNOB, Iorge

knob includes: SCREW,

KNOB, Iorge charcoal-

knob includes: SCREW,

BUSHING, % ·32 mounting

hardware: LOCKWASHER, NUT, hex, bushing, LOCKWASHER, LUG,

solder,

SWITCH, slideSWITCH, slid mounting

hardware:

2 NUT, hex,

KNOB,

Io

r

ge

kn

ob

inc

ludes:

SCREW,

unwired-GAIN

connector mount ing

hardware:

1

4-40x

/

4

internal,

4-40x

printed

hardware:

1

4-40x

/

2

internal,

x

rdware: (not

interna

%

-32

x %

9fJ

1

4-40

x

3j

set,

6-32x

charcoal- HOR

set,

6-32x

chorcooi-

set,

6-32x

set,

6-32xl/

x

internal, %

internal,

%

inch

SWEEP

e-S

WEEP

3

4-40x

/

charcoai- NANOSEC/CM

set,

6-32

#51)

(not

included

BHS

#4

inch

board,

(not included

Fi

l

HS

#4

inch

included

11

l,

%

x

#4

VERNIER

/

inch

16

IZ

/

inch

16

DELA

Y

/

inch

16

PULSE

inch

16

inch

11

x

1

x

/

x 1

2

1

%

x

/

DIODE DIODE

in

ch

16

w/brocket

14

contact, female

w/connector

w/switch)

/

inch

16

SYNC

HSS ONTAL

HSS

AMPLITUDE

HSS

/

inch

16

1

/

inches

16

inches

2

HSS

inch

lf

16

inch

3

/M

inch

16

3

9

/

16

(not included w/bvshing)

%-32

[not included w/switch)

,

inch

1

x

"/

519

alone)

a lone)

®

8-7

Parts

REF.

NO

60

61 62

63

64

65

66

67

6B

69 70

71

72

L

is

t-Type

.

262-0375-00 262-0460-00 262-0453-00 262-0500-00

260-0356 260-0385-00 406--0631-00

210-0413-00 210-0012-00 387-0313-00

211-0012-00 21

0-0004-00

210

-

0406-00

210-0202-00 211-0504-00

210-0407-00

387-0336-00 387-0389-00

210-0004-00 210-0406-00

131-0172-00 131-0507-00

210-0202-00 210-0407-00

21

1-

0507-00

210-0803-00

376-0007-00 213-0005-00

384-0225 376-0005-00

213-0005

384-0574-00 358-0029-00

210-0013 210-0413-00

519

FRONT

&

REAR

(Cant'

SERIAl/

MODEl

16

101 162 278 303

-

00

101 162

X162 1080

-

00

-

00

-

00

277 302

1

16

1079

1

61

1

Q

NO

.

Y.

'

2

dj

SWITCH,

wired-NANOSEC/CM SWITCH,

wired-NANOSEC/CM

switch

includes:

SWITCH,

unwired-NANOSEC/CM

SWITCH,

unwired-NANOSEC/CM

BRACKET,

sweep

mounting

hordwore:

NUT,

hex,

3fa-32x%

L

OCKWASH

ER,

PLATE,

coaxial,

mounting

hardware:

SCREW,

4-40

x%

L

OCKWASHER,

NUT

,

hex,

4-40

LUG

, solder,

SE

mounting

hardware:

SCREW,

6-32x

N

UT,

hex,

6-32

PLATE,

circuit

PLATE,

circuit

mounting

hardware:

L

OCKWASHER,

NUT,

hex,

4-40

CONNECTOR, JACK,

tip

mounting

hordwore

L

UG,

solder,

SE

NUT,

hex,

6-32x

mounting

hardware:

coupling SCREW,

extension

,

coupling

I

NG, WASH

hex,

6-

32

x

6Lx%

aluminum

includes:

set,

al

set,

8-32x

hex,

hardware:

ER,

%-32

5

/

8-32x uminum

SCREW, WASHER,

COUPLING,

ROD, COUPLING, mounting hardware: SCREW,

ROD BUSH mounting LOCK NUT,

switch,

internal, clamping

i

nt

3

x

/

#6

1

/

4

x

lj

board board

inlernal,

3

x

/

jock

#6

1

/

inch

16

inch

1

/

8

%-32x internal,

x%

inch ernal,

,

1

inch

4

16

for

4

(not

1

/

{not

(n

inch

{not

inch

8

inch

at

{not

inch

13

'%

BHS

each:

included

BHS

inch

included

/

32

included

%

(see

ref.

(see

ref.

(see

ref.

(see

ref.

front

included

w/bracket)

1

x

/

in

ch

2

included

w/plote]

# 4

included

w/lug)

included w/plate)

# 4

{not

included

w/switch)

HSS

w/coupling)

HSS

inch

wjbushing)

11

x

/

inch

16

#67] #67! #67) #67)

w/connector]

8-8

©

Tektronix 519 Service and user manual

Specifications and Main Features

Frequently Asked Questions

User Manual